JP7184739B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

In a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, a storage unit capable of storing game media supplied from a game island installed in a game hall, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media, and a guide passage forming portion that forms a guide passage for guiding the game media supplied to the storage portion to the payout portion, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are attached to the game frame by screw members. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

JP-A-2003-96050

In the game machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion to the game frame and the screw member attached to the inside of the game island are disengaged, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are disengaged. If the game medium falls into the part, the screw member will be mixed into the payout device together with the game medium. There was a problem that it may be paid out to

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing a screw member from entering a payout portion.

The game machine of means 1 is
Controllable to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and controllable to a special state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a time-saving state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state)). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 41-2) Production control means (for example, production control CPU120) capable of controlling production based on,
When the number of times of the advantageous state that occurred during the advantageous period (for example, the period of continuous residence state) after being controlled from the normal state to the special state until being controlled again to the normal state has reached a specific number of times ( For example, when the number of consecutive residences is "5" or more, which is the first determination number of times), the predetermined numerical data is changed from a first value (eg, "0") to a second value (eg, "1" or "2"). ”) can be updated (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 41-13),
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
a screw drop limiting portion (for example, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, and third cover body 330) provided above the guide passage forming portion;
variable means (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which game media can easily enter and a second state in which game media cannot enter or is difficult to enter;
limiting means for limiting the flow of game media flowing down the guide passage forming portion;
with
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents game media that have fallen on the screw drop-limiting portion from remaining and screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen on the screw drop-limiting portion Can stay on the screw drop limiting portion without falling into the guide passage forming portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336 (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27), recess 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, Fig. 22(C), Fig. 23(A), (B),
See FIG. 24))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. In addition, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include an invention relating to a game machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, as shown in JP 2016-83580 A, a predetermined number of times in a high probability state (variable probability state), which is a special state that is easily controlled to a jackpot state that is more advantageous than the normal state was controlled over a variable number of times of display. However, in such a gaming machine, by the time the high probability state (variable probability state) ends, the advantageous state (jackpot state) controlled to the high probability state (variable probability state) repeatedly occurs, There is a problem that a large amount of game balls, which are game media, may be awarded in a short period of time, and there is a fear of excessively fueling the gambling spirit of the player. There is a demand for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing gambling from excessively increasing due to the provision of game value.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state (high probability high base state or A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a low probability base state)),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 41-2) Production control means (for example, production control CPU120) capable of controlling production based on,
The number of times the advantageous state occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous state period) during which the normal state was never controlled to the normal state after being controlled from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the special state When the specified number of times is reached (for example, when the number of consecutive residences is "5" or more, which is the first judgment number), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example, "0"). For example, update means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 41-13) that can be updated to "1" or "2"),
Adjusting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 41-13 and FIG. 2, the CPU 103 sets the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process, thereby prolonging the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game;
with
The game control means can transmit control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 41-13, the CPU 103 Step 162 After executing the transmission setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162 SGS17, the portion for executing the command control processing shown in FIG. 35),
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-27 and 41-28 In addition, in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and variably displays using the notice effect type determination table according to the identified ball output state. Part that can decide whether to execute the advance notice effect and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment is executed to reduce the speed at which the game value is given. It is possible to prevent gambling property from excessively increasing due to the impartation of game value, and to improve the amusement of the game because performance control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be executed. .

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention together with the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It may have.

It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a left side view showing the pachinko game machine. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a frame for a game machine to which a game board is attached; It is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko game machine is seen from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame; It is an enlarged rear view showing the rear upper part of the frame for gaming machines. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 10A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 10A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 10A. (A) is a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is an EE cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is an FF cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view along II of (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view along JJ of (A), and (D) is a third cover body. and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the circumference|surroundings of the ball|bowl tank part in the back surface of the game frame from diagonally behind. (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame from diagonally behind. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame. 21. (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing a rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view along PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a cross-sectional view along QQ in FIG. FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 21; FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 21; (A) is the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper when the ball stopper is in the second state. FIG. 10D is a UU cross-sectional view of FIG. 1C, showing a retained state of the screw member; It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st guide passage formation part which shows the movement condition of a screw member. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide path forming portion showing the movement state of the game ball on the cover portion. (A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modification, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to cross the cover portion. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the gaming machine in the characteristic part 053SG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the state by which the input circuit and the output circuit were mounted in the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data bus formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern branched from the data bus in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a connection mode of low-voltage components and high-voltage components mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the connector mounted in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state where the game control board in Example 1 was accommodated in the board case. It is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern for the power supply formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the wiring pattern formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and the wiring pattern for power supply formed in the soldering surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2 in connection with the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit. It is a circuit diagram related to the connection between the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit in the game control board in the second embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above the specific electronic component, (B) is a lower side of the specific electronic component 1 is a perspective view from . It is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a specific electronic component is soldered to the game control board in Example 3. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is the schematic of a movable body unit. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing whether or not a pre-reading advance notice effect is executed and the determination ratio of the display pattern; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of updating a first reserved memory display area and a second reserved memory display area; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a variable display control timer and a movable body control timer; It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach α1 jackpot and super reach α2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach α1 loss and super reach α2 loss. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach β1 jackpot and the super reach β2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the presence or absence of a movable body suggesting motion and an image magnification ratio in each enlargement display period; (A) is a diagram showing an effect mode of each movable body action suggesting effect, and (B) is a view showing an effect mode of each movable body action effect. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation form to the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the ready-to-win production in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the ready-to-win production in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine of the characteristic portion 162SG. (A), (B), and (C) are diagrams illustrating effect control commands. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the variable display time of each variation pattern, and a ball-out state flag. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main process in the pachinko game machine of characteristic part 162SG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control in the pachinko game machine of characteristic part 162SG. (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the ball-out state determination process, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball-out state flag value and each adjustment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the state of progress of the big win and the state of opening and closing the big prize opening. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball output state flag value and each period in the jackpot state. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of the big win (excluding the probability variable jackpot C), and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of the loss. is. (A) is a diagram showing a first reserved memory display area and a second reserved memory display area, and (B) is a diagram showing an update example of the first reserved memory display area and the second reserved memory display area. . 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an advance notice effect determination process; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing advance notice effect type determination tables A to C; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a winning variation pattern determination table to be selected according to the value of the put-out state flag;

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
It is characterized by having

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the cover portion of the third cover body 330) provided to partially cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion 334),
The cover restricts screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) dropped on the cover from falling to the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). Predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recesses 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 2,
The predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) are provided so that game media that have fallen on the cover portion can fall from the cover portion without staying there. It is characterized by
According to this feature, the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restricting portion, and a state in which the screw member can always stay can be maintained. can be prevented.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to form 2 or 3,
The predetermined restricting portion has a first retention portion (eg, long hole 316A) capable of retaining the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped on the cover portion. ~ 316C) and a second retention portion (eg, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention section is provided at a position closer to the dispensing section (for example, dispensing device 200) than the first retention section, and is larger than the first retention section (L22B>L21).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as the dispensing portion is approached, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
The dispensing portion (eg, dispensing device) of the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped into the guiding passage forming portion (eg, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) 200) are provided with a plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) (see FIGS. 12 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to form 5,
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H),
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size that allows the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion to drop outside the guide passage forming portion before reaching the dispensing portion. have (L11>L2, see FIG. 11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if a screw member is mixed in the guide passage forming portion, it can be dropped out of the guide passage forming portion from the hole. can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the guide passage forming portion from obstructing the flow of the game medium.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to form 6,
The plurality of holes have different sizes,
A predetermined hole that is the largest among the plurality of holes is provided at a position closest to the dispensing portion (for example, the lateral dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the lateral dimension of the other holes 271A to 271G. See Figure 12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, so that the screw member dropped into the guide passage forming portion can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing portion. .

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to form 6 or 7,
The cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the third cover body 330, and There is an uncovered area (e.g., uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover portion 334 of
At least some of the plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271B to 271H) are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions in the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the screw member enters the guide passage-forming portion from the uncoated region, it can be dropped out of the guide passage-forming portion through the hole.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 8,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The reservoir is
Arranged on the upper surface side of a predetermined portion (for example, the first projecting portion 224) of the game frame,
It is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that the screw member does not enter between it and the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30<L1, see FIG. 19B).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion of the game frame and the storage portion and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A first board (e.g., main board 11, effect control board 12, etc.) attached to a lower position than the guide passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202);
a second substrate (for example, a terminal substrate 210) attached at a position above the guide passage forming portion;
with
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using screw members, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members (for example, the board cases 11A and 12A are mounted using screw members). The terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members. See Figure 17)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The second board is an external output board (e.g., terminal board 210) to which a wiring (e.g., cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected,
The first substrate has a smaller number of wirings to be connected than the external output substrate (for example, the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal substrate 210 as the first substrate provided above the first guide path forming portion 202). While the number of cables C that can be connected to is set to the first number (for example, 20), the second Each signal line is also connected to the substrate, but the second number (for example, 10) is smaller than the first number.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is likely to be subjected to an external force during the wiring connection work, cannot be attached with a screw member. It is possible to prevent falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to form 10 or 11,
a game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201);
a mounting frame (for example, a board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board to the game frame;
with
The mounting frame is characterized by having a mounting frame restricting portion (for example, recessed portion 242) for restricting the movement of the screw member dropped onto the mounting frame to the guide passage forming portion.
According to this feature, the attachment frame of the external output board can be used to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the dispensing portion.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
The guide passages of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) around the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) Special restricting portions (for example, recessed portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to restrict dropping into the forming portion (Figs. 22(C), 23(A), (B), 24 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to form 13,
The special restricting portion moves the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the guide passage forming portion. A special retention portion (for example, recessed portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attached portion,
A threaded member that has been detached from the attached portion but has not been retained in the special retention portion can move toward the cover portion (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to form 13 or 14,
the special retention portion is a recess (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of accommodating at least a portion of the screw member;
The depth of the recess is the depth to which a portion of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is accommodated (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member retained in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 15,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The cover portion is provided so as to incline downward toward the dispensing portion side,
A specific portion (for example, a ball stop member 340) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion is provided on the payout portion side of the cover portion in the inclined direction (see FIG. 15, Figures 26 and 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to form 16,
The specific part (for example, the ball stopping member 340) has a first state in which the game medium (for example, the game ball P) of the guide path forming part (for example, the first guide path forming part 202) can flow down; It can be changed to a second state in which the game medium in the guide passage forming portion is difficult to flow down or cannot flow down (for example, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the standing position and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344). A first state in which the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 can flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, and the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344. It is possible to change to a second state in which it is possible to contact the game ball and the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down to the second guide path forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down).) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member tends to stay more easily than when it is in the first state (see FIG. 26).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to form 16 or 17,
The cover part
A first cover portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) provided with a retention portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) that allows screw members dropped onto the cover portion to be retained on the cover portion ( For example, the cover portion 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320),
a second cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided with the specific portion different from the first cover portion;
It is characterized by including
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to form 18,
The second cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) is attached by a screw member (for example, a screw member N16) having a locking portion (for example, a flange portion F) (see FIG. 8 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 19,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The storage portion is attached to the game frame at a plurality of locations by screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) having locking portions,
A screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the game frame is designed to fall outside the guiding passage forming portion even if the screw member is disengaged from the game frame. Installed (see Figure 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that attaches the storage portion is made difficult to come off from the game frame, and the screw member that attaches the storage portion and the guide passage formation portion falls outside the guide passage formation portion even if it comes off. It is possible to prevent the threaded member that has fallen into the passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to form 20,
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) and the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) Of these, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the periphery of the game machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 20 or 21,
Screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage portion (for example, ball tank forming portion 201) to the game frame (for example, game machine frame 3) are provided for reinforcing the game frame. Attached to a metal member (for example, a metal plate 222) (see FIG. 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the reservoir can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 22,
Screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached to positions above the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are It is a screw member different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 23,
A game board (e.g., game board 2) detachable from the game frame (e.g., game machine frame 3) is provided,
In the area below the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game board, there is an inclined surface (for example, the upper portion of the cover body 220) that allows the falling screw member to flow down. wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 18 to 20 and FIG. 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped from the guide passage forming portion onto the game board to bounce and be mixed into the guide passage forming portion again.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 24,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The guide passage forming portion is
a first passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202) extending downward toward one side (e.g., left side);
a second passage forming portion (for example, a second guide passage forming portion 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming portion;
has
The cover portion is provided along the first passage forming portion so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portion moves and falls outside the guide passage forming portion from the lower end (Fig. 29 ( A) See)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2 to 25,
A wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided so as to cross the guide passage forming portion at a position near the predetermined restriction portion (for example, the recessed portion 361) in the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1). (see FIG. 29(B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is likely to get caught on the wiring and remain in the predetermined restricting portion.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned is defined as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is defined as the rear. Also, the description will be made with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from a player positioned in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area Y is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot and struck in the game area Y from a predetermined ball shooting device. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided in the game machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. (not shown), a guide rail 2b, etc., and a spacer member integrally attached to the back side of the board. The game board 2 is made of a non-translucent member such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. may be configured

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area Y), special symbols (also called special symbols) as special identification information of a plurality of types are variably displayed (also called a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Incidentally, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 . A frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special game and the variable display of the decoration pattern which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area), a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the first reservation display 25A displays the first reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, the variable winning ball device 6B includes a starting winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, thereby opening the second starting winning opening. It will be in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the starting winning opening door is in the open position, so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (the second It is also said that the starting prize opening is in an open state.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be one that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. Also, when a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including general winning holes is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area Y). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area Y, there is provided an out port (not shown) into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the peripheral portion of the game area Y. It is The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like in order to shoot a game ball toward the game area Y by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area Y, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be supplied to the ball launching device ( A batted ball supply plate (upper plate) for storage is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a payout port through which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full. A hitting ball supply tray (lower tray) may be provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area Y by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start winning has occurred) If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot type of jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes "small hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some big-hit types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as payout control board 37 (see FIG. 3), information terminal board, launch control board, power supply board 91 (see FIG. 3), etc. are arranged on the back of pachinko game machine 1. there is

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a first start prize or a second start prize, and if there is a prize, a random value for special figure display result determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern determination, etc. , respectively, and stored (stored) at the top of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage section and the second special figure reservation storage section.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit and the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the special figure display result Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for judgment, whether or not the fluctuation display result of the special pattern and the production pattern is a "jackpot" is determined (predetermined) before the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed. Symbol normal processing is executed. In other words, when starting the variable display of the special game, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to derive and display the big win display result as the display result of the variable display based on the random number value stored when the start winning is generated. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the rear structure of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing a game machine frame to which a game board is attached. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko gaming machine is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. 5 to 7, illustration of the glass door frame 50 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 to which the game board 2 is detachably provided, and a left side of the game machine frame 3. A game hall having a glass door frame 50 provided so as to be able to open and close the front surface of the machine frame 3, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 supporting the game machine frame 3 so as to be openable and closable about the left side thereof. By fixing the outer frame 60 to a game island (not shown) installed in the game island, it can be installed on the game island.

At the upper back of the game machine frame 3, a replenishment device 150 (FIGS. 3 and 4) is provided from a circulation path of game balls (hereinafter also referred to as game balls P) provided inside game islands (not shown). ), forming a ball tank forming portion 201 that forms a storage portion capable of storing game balls supplied through the ball tank forming portion 201, and forming a first guide passage that guides the game balls stored in the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the left side. A first guide passage forming portion 202 and a first passage forming body 203 extending in the left-right direction along the upper side portion 3A of the frame 3 for a game machine. A terminal substrate 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide path forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

The replenishing device 150 has a guiding member 150A composed of a nozzle or the like capable of guiding the game balls on the circulation route of the game island, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls guided by the guiding member 150A. a sprocket (not shown) capable of driving the sprocket, a drive source (not shown) for driving the sprocket, and the game machine frame 3 when the opening of the outer frame 60 is closed by the game machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game balls sent out by the sprocket enter the ball tank forming portion 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the open state, the game ball delivered by the sprocket is held so as not to fall. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming part 201 decreases while the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the drive source rotates the sprocket and the game balls are sent out by a predetermined number to the ball tank forming part 201. It is designed to be supplied to In the replenishment device 150, a case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members with a plurality of screw members (not shown). It is fixed at a predetermined location.

In addition, a second guide path forming portion 204 that forms a second guide path that guides the game ball guided to the left side by the first guide path forming portion 202 downward, and a game guided by the second guide path forming portion 204 A payout device 200 constituting a payout section capable of putting out balls, and a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the payout device 200 to the upper tray, that is, forming a payout passage for paying out the game balls to the player. Pachinko game for discharging the game balls guided by the payout passage forming part 205 and the second guiding passage forming part 204 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 without paying out from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205 A second passage forming body 207 comprising a ball removing passage forming portion 206 that forms a ball removing passage leading to a discharge portion (not shown) provided on the lower back side of the machine 1 is provided in the gaming machine frame 3. It extends vertically along the left side of the back surface of the .

The payout device 200 is composed of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has therein a sprocket for paying out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one ball) at a time, a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game ball. A switching valve capable of switching the passage of the balls between the paying-out passage and the ball-removing passage, an operation lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Further, a board case 91A in which the power board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which the payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided at the lower back of the gaming machine frame 3 .

In this embodiment, a ball break switch (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided at a predetermined position of the second guide path, and the CPU 103 receives a detection signal from the ball break switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there are game balls to be paid out in the second guide passage on the upstream side of the payout device 200.例文帳に追加When the off state of the ball-out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined time or longer, it is determined that game balls are not supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball clogging, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and payout is performed. The payout operation by the device 200 is stopped. In addition, a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 displays a replenishment error, and by outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 displays the glass door frame 50. A game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined place on the front face is illuminated in an error mode, so that notification processing to the effect that a replenishment error has occurred can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 2 is detachably arranged from the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in an opening 221 formed substantially in the central portion of the gaming machine frame 3 . The game board 2 includes a plate-like body 2a made up of the above-described board plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-like body 2a, and the plate-like body 2a. Electronic components such as an image display device 5 provided on the back side, a production device having a movable body 32, a board case 12A in which the production control board 12 is stored, a board case 11A in which the main board 11 is stored, and a plate-shaped It is a structure including a cover body 220 that protects a part, a production device, electronic parts, and the like.

The substrate cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are configured so that each substrate can be housed therein by a base member and a cover member made of a transparent synthetic resin material. , are attached to the game machine frame 3 or the game board 2 by one or more screw members N20, N21 (see FIG. 3), respectively, and the board cases 91A, 37A are attached to the game machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Or it is attached to the game board 2 . The cover body 220 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material in the shape of a box with an open front surface. part can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, a first passage formation body 203 and a second passage formation body 207 provided on the back surface of the game machine frame 3, and a cover body 220 constituting the back surface of the game board 2 are It protrudes rearward from the outer frame 60 when the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3 . In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided so that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged behind the upper plate of the outer frame 60 on the upper back surface of the frame 3 for a game machine, so that the pachinko machine can be used for pachinko games. In a state in which the outer frame 60 of the game machine 1 is fixed to a game island (not shown), game balls can be supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 through the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. .

(Mounting Structure of First Passage Forming Body 203)
Next, the mounting structure of the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame. FIG. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper rear portion of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game machine frame 3 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and is provided with an opening 221 for mounting the game board 2 thereon. A reinforcing metal plate 222 is provided in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the upper side portion 3A. A mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 is mounted on the back surface of the metal plate 222 .

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so as to be able to cover the metal plate 222 from the back side. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by screwing each into a plurality of formed screw holes. On the right side of the mounting member 223, a plate-shaped first projecting portion 224 protrudes rearward, and on the left side of the mounting member 223, an upper wall portion 225A, a rear wall portion 225B, and left and right side wall portions 225C. A three-dimensional second projecting portion 225 projects rearward.

The first projecting portion 224 projects rearward from a lower position than the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 is arranged on the upper side thereof. In addition, the first guide path forming portion 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225, and the board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted on the upper side thereof. ing. The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 .

Thus, the mounting member 223 is formed to cover the upper side of the game board 2 by having the first projecting portion 224 and the second projecting portion 225 projecting backward. Therefore, game balls supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 from above the game islands are prevented from entering the game board 2 . In other words, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2 .

The first passage forming body 203 includes a plurality of screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of mounting holes H11 to H14 from the rear side and a screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 from the upper side. They are attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing into the screw holes. The screw member N12 attached to the mounting hole H12 also serves as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 for removing the electricity charged in the first passage forming member 203 to the first passage forming member 203. A first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper portion of the first passage forming body 203. As shown in FIG. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing a screw member N16 attached to the mounting hole H16 from above into a screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. there is

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 8, the threaded members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 include a male threaded portion NS and a head portion NH. It is a flanged screw in which a flange part F as a locking part is integrally formed on the bearing surface of the screw, and by increasing the contact area of the bearing surface and increasing the frictional force, it is difficult to loosen compared to the screw members N3 to N6. It is considered as a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of each screw member N1 to N6, N11 to N16 is approximately 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is approximately 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is approximately 4 to 7 mm. 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2.

The sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to those described above. The screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16, which are flanged screws, are screw members integrally formed with a flange portion F (washer). may be attached to the screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened. In addition, the locking portion includes a locking portion for the head NH formed unevenly on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first passage formation body 203 needs to receive and store the game balls supplied from above the game island in the ball tank formation portion 201, and the first guide passage It is formed in a concave shape with an open upper surface so that clogging of balls is unlikely to occur in the case of clogging of balls, and clogging of balls can be easily eliminated in the event that clogging occurs.

In addition, a first cover body 310 and a second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of the portion where the game balls accumulated in the ball tank forming portion 201 in the vertical direction flow into the first guide passage forming portion 202. In addition, the third cover body 330 is arranged so as to cover the upper surface of the portion where the ball flows from the first guide path forming portion 202 to the second guide path forming portion 204, so that the game ball is rectified. However, although a part of the top opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered with the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, the sphere tank forming part 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( 27) is open.

On the other hand, in the vicinity of the periphery of the first passage forming body 203, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223 are arranged. In addition, above the pachinko machine 1 fixed to the game island, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks constituting the game island, and various devices (for example, A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishing device 150, etc., to the frame or the like, and a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case bodies of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members are loosened and fall off due to vibration or shock generated in the game island or the pachinko game machine 1, they will roll due to the vibration or shock or the opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming part 201 or the first screw member will roll. There is a possibility that they fall inside from the non-covered area 350 of the guiding passage forming part 202 and mix into the guiding passage of the game ball. In particular, the replenishment device 150 and the like are arranged in the vicinity directly above the ball tank forming section 201 as shown in FIGS. , or when the game machine frame 3 is opened or closed, the replenishment device 150 is likely to vibrate, so a screw member ( (not shown), or when a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishment device 150 are loosened due to vibration and fall off, the inside of the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 very likely to fall.

Then, when the screw member drops into the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 side as the game ball flows down, and finally enter the payout device 200. When the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket or the switching valve may be damaged by the screw member, or the payout motor may be damaged due to the load caused by the ball clogging, or the screw member may be damaged by the player along with the game ball. There is a risk that the player will be paid out immediately, giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 mixes with the dispensing device 200 and damages or breaks down the dispensing device 200, or the screw member is broken together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to suppress the payout to the player.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10, (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. 11, (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10A. It is a diagram. 12, (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). 13, (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE of (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF of (A). 14, (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). 15, (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in (A), and (D) is a third cover member. 3 is a perspective view showing a cover body, and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. 16, (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guiding passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows a guidance passage formation part.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material, and has a bottom wall portion 203A and a vertical wall portion 203B erected on the periphery of the bottom wall portion 203A. is formed in a concave shape or a concave groove shape with an opening, and has a ball tank forming portion 201 arranged on the right side and a first guiding passage forming portion 202 arranged on the left side. The sphere tank forming portion 201 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed by an upstream portion extending obliquely rearward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and a downstream portion extending in the left-right direction. Become. The longitudinal dimension of the ball tank forming portion 201 is longer than the longitudinal dimension of the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that more game balls than the first guide passage forming portion 202 can be stored. It is Further, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to gradually incline downward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, The game ball naturally flows down toward the ball tank formation part 201 and the first guide passage formation part 202 to the left.

A mounting piece 261 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 facing in the front-rear direction are formed in the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 261. . A mounting piece 265 projects from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and the mounting piece 265 is formed with a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction. A mounting piece 262 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the left standing wall portion 203B of the first guiding passage forming portion 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 protrudes forward from the outer surface of the front vertical wall portion 203B in the upstream portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 . A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and the mounting piece 263 is formed with a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing a plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. As shown in FIG. A concave portion 280 having a substantially square shape in a plan view is formed on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264 at a position near the rear of the mounting piece 263 .

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, hole portions 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall portion 203A in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the rear vertical wall portion 203B ( See FIG. 11(A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed downstream of the holes 271A and 271B at approximately the central position in the front-rear direction of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B. In addition, a communication hole 272 is formed through the bottom wall portion 203A at the downstream end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to drop the game ball into the second guide passage forming portion 204 below. .

A meandering portion 273 is formed in the middle of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and causes the game ball to meander in the front-rear direction and flow down toward the left side. is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273 . By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure due to the succeeding ball is prevented from increasing.

In addition, the distance L10 between the front and rear vertical wall portions 203B and 203B lower portions of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (about 11 mm) of the game ball and twice the diameter 2R (about 22 mm). (11 mm<L10<22 mm). That is, the first guide path forming portion 202 is formed so as to be able to guide the game balls in one row toward the downstream side.

Since the longitudinal dimension L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B is slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the heads NH of the screw members N3 to N6 (L11>L2), as will be described later, the screw members N3 to Even if N6 enters the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can drop from the holes 271A to 271H. In addition, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest lateral dimension L12 (dimension in the downstream direction of the game ball) compared to the other holes 271A to 271G, the screw members N3 to N6 are connected to the communication hole 272. can be reliably dropped outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 before reaching the .

In other words, these holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that dirt and dust other than the threaded member, or any other member can fall from these plurality of holes 271A to 271H.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C, the first cover body 310 extends along the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B extends. A mounting portion 311 having a downward U-shape in cross section that can be fitted from above, a vertical wall portion 312 extending from the right side of the mounting portion 311 toward the rear side, and a right side from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 (forming a ball tank). 201 side), a cover portion 314 extending from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming portion 202 side), and an attachment A plurality of engaging portions 315A to 315D elastically deformable are mainly formed on the front side of the portion 311 and on the front and rear sides of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

The first cover body 310 configured in this manner is configured such that the mounting portion 311 is attached to the sphere tank forming portion 201 while the vertical wall portion 312 is arranged near the boundary between the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 . By fitting the upper end of the front standing wall portion 203B from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203 . In the attached state, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged to cover a portion of the downstream side of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above, and the cover portion 314 is arranged to cover a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The upper surface of the cover portion 314 is arranged so as to be slightly downward toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 (see FIG. 9).

When the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding part 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming part 201 side, so that the ball tank forming part 201 is moved from the game island (not shown). Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to pile up in the vertical direction, the game balls are rectified by being pressed downward by the ball pressing portion 313 when flowing down to the first guide passage forming portion 202 side. It is designed to be

In the cover portion 314, long holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction and having the shape of a horizontally long rectangle in a plan view are formed vertically through the cover portion 314 while being arranged in parallel rows. Each of the long holes 316A-316C has the same longitudinal dimension L21, and the longitudinal dimension L21 is shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the screw members N1-N6 and N11-N16 mentioned above. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21<2R, L21<L2). In other words, the long holes 316A-316C are formed in a size that prevents the game balls and screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 from falling. Reinforcing ribs hang down from the peripheries of the long holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

In addition, since the long holes 316A to 316C are extended along the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIGS. In this case, the game ball P can move in the downstream direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, the second cover body 320 includes a plate-like cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a cover portion 324 and a plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B which are elastically deformable. In the close state, the plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 302B, so that the first passage forming body 203 Mounted on. In the attached state, the cover portion 324 covers a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball (FIG. 9). reference).

On the upper surface of the cover portion 324, recessed grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed in rows. The concave grooves 326A-326C have different front-to-rear dimensions L22A-L22C, but are each shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A-L22C<2R). The longitudinal dimension L22B of the central groove 326B, which has the longest longitudinal dimension, is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L2). In other words, the recessed groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate game balls and that can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L22B of the groove 326B is longer than the front-rear dimension L21 of the long holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B>L21).

In addition, since the front-rear dimension L22A of the recessed groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the recessed groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L1, L22C>L1 ), and is sized to accommodate at least the externally threaded portion NS.

In addition, since the concave grooves 326A to 326C extend along the flowing direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, FIGS. 2, when the game ball P falls to the upper part of the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the flowing direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C and 16, the third cover body 330 includes a plate-like cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. , a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D elastically deformable formed on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334, and a screw member N15 protruding between the locking portions 335C and 335D on the rear surface and mounted from above. A mounting portion 331 having a hole H15 formed therein and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end of the upper surface of the cover portion 334. It is elastically locked to a locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the portion 302B, and the screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the screw hole provided on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by inserting it. In the attached state, the cover portion 334 covers the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream direction of the game ball (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and a concave portion 336 having a predetermined depth extends from the right end portion of the upper surface toward the left side. Since the right part reaches the meandering part 273 , it is formed corresponding to the shape of the meandering part 273 . At a position corresponding to the concave portion 336, a horizontally long U-shaped slit 337 is formed in plan view, thereby forming a rectifying plate 338 whose left end side is elastically deformable so as to swing vertically. At the right end, an inclined plate portion 339 inclined downward toward the right side is formed, so that the game balls P stacked up and down are guided toward the bottom wall portion 203A and leveled. (See Fig. 16).

The front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L23 >2R, L23>L2). That is, the recessed portion 336 is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the game ball P and the heads NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-rear dimension L22B of the recessed groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23>L22B).

In addition, since the concave portion 336 extends along the flowing direction of the game ball and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIG. When the game ball P falls on the upper part of 336, the game ball P is guided toward the flowing direction (left side).

In addition, since the longitudinal dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L24<L2), the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 ˜N16 do not drop from the slit 337.

The ball stopper member 340 includes a plate-like front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear, a rear wall portion 341B arranged on the rear side of the front wall portion 341A, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating portion 341 having a connected left wall portion 341C, a projecting wall portion 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall portion 341C, and a cylindrical shaft portion 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing portions 343A and 343B are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover portion 334 to rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft portion 342 . A slit 344 is formed through the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334 so that the front wall portion 341A can be inserted therethrough.

As shown in FIG. 16 , when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage formation body 203 , the downstream portion of the first guide passage formation portion 202 is covered by the cover portion 324 . Since the cover portion 324 is arranged to be inclined downward toward the bottom wall portion 203A toward the downstream side (left side), the game balls P stacked up and down in the first guide passage forming portion 202 are covered with the cover portion 324. While flowing down, it is leveled, and finally it is made possible to flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. - 特許庁In particular, the straightening plate 338 is elastically deformable when a game ball comes into contact with it, so that it smoothes (rectifies) the game ball so as to press it downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stop member 340)
As shown in FIG. 16A, the ball stopper member 340 is rotatable between an upright position in which the rotating portion 341 stands up and a tilted position in which the rotating portion 341 tilts to the right. is located in the standing position, the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204; The part 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can contact the game ball, and the game ball of the first guide path formation part 202 cannot flow down to the second guide path formation part 204 (or difficult), that is, the ball-stopped state.

By setting the ball stop member 340 to the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second guide passage formation portion 204, so that the game inside the second guide passage formation portion 204 in this state It is possible to extract the ball and remove the dispensing device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened and consists of a front wall portion 341A, a rear wall portion 341B, and a left wall portion 341C. The space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall in plan view functions as a retaining portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained as described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state, the rotating portion 341 is tilted, but the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the projecting wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described based on FIG. 17 with reference to FIG. 17, (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). .

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and has a cable connecting portion (not shown) to which a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 or the like is detachable on the back. ) and a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. Connection pinches (not shown) for pinching the ends of the cables C are provided inside the mounting member 232 at positions corresponding to the connection holes 231 . A spring (not shown) is provided for biasing the connection pinch in the direction of closing it, that is, in the direction of clamping the tip of the cable C. As shown in FIG. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation portions 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the biasing force of a spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 is set to the first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to a second board such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming portion 202, but the number of lines is less than the first number. It is set to the number (for example, 10).

A plurality of the operation portions 233 are provided corresponding to the respective connection holes 231, and have a substantially hook-like shape when viewed from the side, and are swung in the front-rear direction with the base end thereof as the swing axis. When opening the connection pinch (not shown), the operation portion 233 is pushed upward or downward to swing the operation portion 233, thereby releasing the connection pinch (not shown). When the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole portion 231 with the connection pinch opened and the pressing operation of the operation portion 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the biasing force of the spring (not shown). Cable C comes to be held. The operation portions 233 arranged in the left-right direction have different shapes alternately in the left-right direction so that when a predetermined operation portion 233 is pressed, the adjacent operation portions 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation. there is

The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 . Further, a horizontally long rectangular opening 234 is formed in the board mounting frame 211 .

On the inner surface of the substrate mounting frame 211, a plurality of restricting portions 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal substrate 210 by engaging with the periphery of the terminal substrate 210 inserted from the front side, and the restricting portions 235 prevent the terminal substrate 210 from moving forward. a plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked from the front side to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 whose movement is restricted; have. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and is elastically locked by the locking parts 236 in a state where forward movement is restricted by the plurality of restricting parts 235, thereby mounting the board. It is attached to the frame 211 . That is, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members (using a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members). Mounted.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which the cables C can be connected, during wiring work for connecting a plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231, an operation portion 233 corresponding to each cable C can be operated. need to operate. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island and the game machine frame 3 is opened for inspection by a game hall clerk or the like, the cable C hanging down from the upper part of the game island is attached to the outer frame. It may be pulled around in front of 60 and tension may be applied to the connection. In other words, since the terminal board 210 is likely to be subjected to a load on the mounting portion, if it is attached to the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 with a screw member, the screw member becomes loose and easily comes off. ing.

In addition, when the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole portion 231 and the operating portion 233 of the terminal board 210 face the rear side through the opening 234 (see FIG. 17A). ). Further, since the plurality of operation portions 233 protrude substantially horizontally toward the rear, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation portions 233 arranged side by side as described later. A recess 242 is formed between the lower portion of the terminal board 210 and the front portion of the board mounting frame 211 to accommodate the screw members N3 to N6.

(Mounting state of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing a state where the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. 19, (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back side of the game frame. 22, (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing a rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. 23, (A) is a sectional view taken along line PP of FIG. 21, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line QQ of FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 21. FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 21. FIG. FIG. 26 shows (A) the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper in the second state. (D) is a UU cross-sectional view of (C). FIG. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing movement of the screw member. FIG. 28 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover portion.

As shown in FIGS. 9, 18 and 19(A), screw members N1 to N1 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 are provided on the sphere tank forming portion 201 and its periphery on the back surface of the frame 3 for the gaming machine. N2 and screw members N11, N12 and N15 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223 are mounted.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached forward from the back side at a position away from the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the right and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low. .

The screw members N11 and N12 are attached forward from the back side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

The screw member N15 is attached downward from the upper side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw member N15 loosens due to vibration or shock generated in the machine 1 and falls upward, the possibility of falling into the sphere tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12 and N15 receive and store the game balls supplied from the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island and form a ball tank on which the load of many game balls is applied. Vibrations and impacts are likely to occur due to being arranged around the portion 201, so a screw member with a flange is used, which has a large contact area with the attached portion and is less prone to loosening.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the sphere tank forming portion 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the sphere tank forming portion 201 even if they are loosened and fall off, that is, at the upper surface opening of the sphere tank forming portion 201. , the game balls supplied from the replenishing device 150 from the circulation path above the game islands are received and stored in the ball tank forming portion 201, which is open at the top. suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-like first projecting portion 224 projecting rearward from the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 is smaller than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the screw member (L30<L1). It is almost impossible for the screw member to be caught between the wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201 .

Further, the gap L31 formed between the rear portion of the bottom wall portion 203A of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 is larger than the head portion L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F. is also long (L3>L2), the flanged screw member is almost never caught in the gap L31 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201. As shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19B, if the screw member N15 slips out of the mounting hole H15 as the mounted portion and falls onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall portion 220H is Since the screw member N15 is inclined downward toward the back side, the dropped screw member N15 flows down either rearward or leftward, so that it is almost never held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member N15 from entering each of the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A provided below the sphere tank forming portion 201 and contacting the wiring of the substrate to cause disconnection or the like. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9, 20 and 21A, screw members N3 to N5 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and the substrate A screw member N6 for mounting the mounting frame 211 to the mounting member 223, screw members N13 and N14 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223, A threaded member N16 for attaching to is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front side and are positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the front from the rear side. In addition, the second projecting portion 225 of the mounting member 223 is arranged between the mounting position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member Although there is a certain distance from the mounting position of each of N3 to N6 to the first guide passage forming portion 202, the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so the pachinko game machine 20, when the screw members N3 to N6 are loosened due to vibrations or shocks generated in 1 and fall off rearward, as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a recessed groove 227 for avoiding interference with the head portion NH when mounting the screw member N3 to the mounting hole H3 is formed in a straight line toward the rear. has been extended to The groove 227 is formed so that the width of the groove 227 tapers toward the rear and becomes shallower. The bottom surface of 227 is substantially horizontal (or slightly slanted downward toward the rear side).

Therefore, when the screw member N3 is loosened and falls out backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N3 falls into the concave groove 227 on the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (Fig. 22(A)). In addition, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the groove 227 is likely to be guided to move rearward in a straight line when vibration or impact occurs. , the screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than in the region other than the concave groove 227. In other words, the concave groove 227 constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Here, all the screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of the head NH and the male threaded portion NS. In many cases, the screw member N3 is tilted in a state in which two points with the tip are in contact (see FIG. 22(A)), so that the tilted screw member N3 as shown in FIG. Occasionally, the head NH swings around the tip of the male threaded portion NS and changes direction. Therefore, if it falls on a flat surface other than the groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the groove 227, it may move linearly backward, or the head may move backward. The NH may also move to turn left or right by rotating its head. That is, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 20, if it moves backward and bends to the right, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the first cover body 310. There is a high possibility that it will fall on the second cover body 320, and if it moves backward and bends to the left, there is a high possibility that it will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 in front of the first guide passage.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the recessed groove 227 and then bent rearward to the right, the first cover body There is a high possibility of falling onto the cover portion 314 of 310 . As shown in FIG. 22A, when the screw member N3 drops onto the cover portion 314, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male threaded portion NS intersects the long holes 316A to 316C, or the male threaded portion NS falls. Although it is inserted into any one of the long holes 316A to 316C, the head NH is retained on the cover portion 314 without falling from the cover portion 314 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 by being locked without falling off. will do. In other words, the long holes 316A to 316C prevent the screw member N3 from dropping onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 onto the cover portion 314 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then linearly moved rearward, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage is formed. It is likely to fall on horizontal wall 264 of body 203 . As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the threaded member N3 falls onto the cover portion 324, the threaded member N3 tilts so that the male threaded portion NS intersects the grooves 326A to 326C. A portion of the head NH is accommodated in the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, so that the head portion NH stays on the cover portion 324 without falling from the cover portion 324 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the concave grooves 326A to 326C prevent the screw member N3 from falling onto the cover portion 324 provided to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling onto the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

In addition, when falling onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, the horizontal wall portion 264 Stay in a state of leaning to. That is, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is arranged between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, so that the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264 form a concave portion 290 with an open top, so that the liquid is accommodated and retained in the concave portion 290. As shown in FIG. That is, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N3 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the first passage forming body 203, the screw member N13 is separated forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and slightly above the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the attachment hole H13 formed in the attachment piece 263 which is the position. Therefore, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a possibility that the screw member N13 falls into the recess 280 formed near the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. high (see FIG. 23(A)). More specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is arranged between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B. A recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 opened upward by 225A, the standing wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264, so that the recess 280 is accommodated and stays in the recess 280. Become.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23B, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the screw member N13 is arranged on the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264. It may drop and stay in the concave portion 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211 . That is, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N13 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H4. Therefore, when the screw member N4 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N4 falls onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 24, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves backward when it bends to the right, moves backward linearly, and moves backward. As shown in FIG. 24, in any of the cases where the board is turned to the right, it falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 from above the upper wall portion 225A. The screw member N4 dropped from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and stays in the concave portion 242 formed by the substrate mounting frame 211 and the terminal substrate 210, or stays in the substrate mounting frame. Although the male threaded portion NS is inserted into the recessed portion 243 formed between 211 and the standing wall portion 203B, the head portion NH may be retained by being locked without falling off. That is, the recessed portion 242 and the recessed portion 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. A special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N4 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is constructed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 drops from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation portions 233. As shown in FIG. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island, the plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 hang down from the upper part of the game island (see FIG. 3). C may also prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. That is, the operating portion 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202. This constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the threaded member N4 into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves rearward so as to bend to the right, and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body 203 is removed from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202. 310 , an uncovered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330 , which is not covered by either the second cover body 320 or the third cover body 330 , to the first guide passage forming portion 202 . to fall. The screw member N4 that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side as the game ball P flows down, and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. It falls from one of the holes 271B to 271D formed at the position corresponding to the non-coated area 350 in the guide passage forming portion 202 and is discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG.

Further, even if it does not fall from any one of the holes 271B to 271D, it will eventually fall from one of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG. In other words, the holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves backward and bends to the left, and then crosses the standing wall portion 203B, the screw member N4 falls onto the concave portion 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By dropping, it is accommodated and stays in the concave portion 336 without dropping from the cover portion 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the recessed portion 336 restricts the screw member N4 from dropping onto the first guide passage forming portion 202, which has fallen onto the cover portion 334 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. constitutes a predetermined limit part of

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is formed in the substrate mounting frame 211 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward so as to move linearly rearward. After that, when it moves so as to bend to the right, as shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 16, the cover part 334 covers the upper opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side (dispensing device 200 side). There is a high possibility that the screw member N6 that has fallen to a position in the vicinity of the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 will move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved downstream comes into contact with the ball stop member 340 provided at the downstream end (left end) of the cover portion 334, which is the lower inclined side, and Left side) is restricted to stay on the cover portion 334 .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B are opened. , the left wall portion 341C, and the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in plan view. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 26(C) and 26(D), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned so as to cross the passage in an upright state, so that the screw member N6 is placed on the protruding wall. Since the screw member N6 can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without dropping from the cover portion 334. FIG.

In the second state, the projecting wall portion 341D is arranged so as to intersect the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may drop backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C cover the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C. It can be retained more reliably than in the second state in which the left wall portion 341C is positioned only on the left side. In other words, the ball stopper member 340 is provided on the side of the dispensing device 200 in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, and constitutes a specific portion capable of causing the screw member N6 dropped onto the cover portion 334 to stay in the cover portion 334. is doing.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the threaded member N5 is separated from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the mounting member 223 to the front and right side, and is positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Although it is attached to the formed mounting hole H5, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not arranged right behind the mounting hole H5, and the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is also cut halfway. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backward, it will drop onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, but before it reaches the first guide passage forming portion 202, There is a high possibility of dropping from the upper wall portion 225</b>A to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

The screw member N16 is attached to an attachment hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 is loosened by vibration or impact and falls out backward, it is highly likely that it will fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. .

(action/effect)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. N3 to N6, etc. are loosened due to vibrations and impacts generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall off, and after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibrations, impacts, opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, etc., the cover When it falls on the parts 314, 324, 334, the long holes 316A to 316C, the concave grooves 326A to 326C, the concave part 336 and the ball stop member 340 restrict the fall to the first guide passage forming part 202, Since there is a high possibility that the screws will remain on the cover portions 314, 324, 334 without falling from the cover portions 314, 324, 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screws that have fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 It is possible to prevent the member from moving and mixing into the dispensing device 200 . In addition, since vertical wall portions are formed at the left (downstream) ends of the long holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves to the left, can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28 , on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 , the regions other than the uncovered region 350 are covered with the cover portions 314 , 324 and 334 , but the sphere tank forming portion 201 Even if the replenished game ball spills out and gets on the cover parts 314, 324 on the upstream side, the longitudinal dimensions of the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C are smaller than the diameter 2R of the game ball P. Since the space is also narrow, the game ball P rolls leftward and then falls from the left end of the cover portion 324 to the uncovered area 350 and is returned into the first guide path forming portion 202 .

Therefore, not only can the game ball that has landed on the cover portions 314 and 324 be returned into the first guide path forming portion 202, but also the game ball P can be retained in the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the falling screw member N stays is restricted, or it comes into contact with the staying game ball and falls from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball falls on the cover portion 334, it either flows down on the cover portion 334 toward the left side and is restricted by the ball stopper member 340, or falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. do.

In addition, in the long holes 316A to 316C as the first retaining portion and the concave grooves 326A to 326C as the second retaining portion, the concave groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the long holes 316A to 316C, A front-rear dimension L22B is larger than a front-rear dimension L22 of the long hole 316B (L22B>L21). By doing so, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as it approaches the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 and 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202. can be prevented.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and stayed on the cover portions 314, 324, and 334 move due to vibration, impact, etc., and the non-covered portions provided between the cover portions 324 and 334 move. When it falls from the region 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A like the screw member N4, it falls from the uncovered region 350 to the first guiding passage forming portion 202. Even if the game ball P falls directly inside the first guide passage forming portion 202, it falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. As a result, the screw member dropped into the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves to the dispensing device 200 because it falls from one of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. Mixing can be suppressed.

A plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the midstream portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a region where no hole is formed between the holes 270A and 270B which are formed close to each other and the hole 271A which is the most upstream of the holes 271A to 271H. In this way, since a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed is formed in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming portion 201 flow down in a state of being stacked up and down. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A in the vicinity of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to which ball pressure is applied.

In addition, by forming a region in which no holes are formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in this manner, the screw member dropped from the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed in the rear wall portion of the cover body 220. Entry into the cover body 220 through the heat radiation hole 220B (see FIG. 6) or the like can be appropriately suppressed.

In addition, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the regions where the holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is provided with a screw member. can be suppressed from falling, and it is suppressed that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 does not fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 and is mixed into the dispensing device 200. be able to.

In addition, the hole 271H, which is the largest among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member can be preferably transferred from the hole 271H to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350, the game ball is are stacked vertically, the screw member is often located above the game ball, but the hole portion 271H is arranged downstream of the straightening plate 338 of the cover portion 334, that is, , Since the game ball is arranged in a position where the game ball is rectified vertically, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, since at least some of the holes 271B to 271D among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is uncovered. Even if it enters the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the region 350, it can be dropped out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 through the holes 271B to 271D.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271E to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided closer to the dispensing device 200 than the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the above-described Even if the game ball that has fallen from the uncovered area 350 to the first guide passage forming part 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it moves downward while moving with the flow of the game ball and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22C, 23A, 23B, and 24, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 are moved toward the first guide passage forming portion. Recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 as special retention portions that can be retained before reaching 202 are below screw members N3 to N6 attached to attachment holes H3 to H6 as attachment portions. The screw members N3 to N6 provided in the mounting holes H3 to H6 but not retained in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 can move toward the cover portions 314, 324, 334. , the screw members N3 to N6 detached from the mounting holes H3 to H6 can be prevented from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, since the depths of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 are the depths at which the screw members N3 to N6 partially protrude when the screw members N3 to N6 are accommodated, the recesses 280, 290, The screw members N3 to N6 staying in 214, 242, 243 can be easily taken out.

In addition, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243, the long holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 restrict the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Not only does it block (or hinder), but it is a retention part that can be retained outside the first guide path formation part 202, so that the screw member can be found when a store clerk or the like at the game parlor conducts an inspection or the like. Since it becomes possible to identify which screw member has come off, it becomes easier to take countermeasures against mixing of the screw member into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion has the rotating portion 341 positioned at the upright position, the front wall portion 341A deviating upward from the slit 344, and the game ball in the first guide passage forming portion 202 being guided to the second direction. A first state in which it is possible to flow down to the passage forming portion 204, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 is opened. It is possible to change to a second state in which the game ball cannot flow down to the second guide passage forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down), and when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, it is in the first state. Since the screw member is more likely to stay than in the case of , it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

More specifically, the reason why the ball stopper member 340 is set to the second state is, as described above, when the game ball in the first guide passage or the second guide passage is pulled out, that is, when the game parlor clerk or the like operates the pachinko game machine. 1, the ball stop member 340 is put in the first state, while the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the game hall clerk or the like cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the screw member from entering the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

In addition, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange portions F as looseness preventing portions. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching to the game machine frame 3 are arranged so as to fall outside the first guide path formation part 202 even if they are detached from the game machine frame 3. It is mounted below the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201 . Therefore, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the sphere tank forming part 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the game ball. Even if the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the first guide passage forming part 202 come off, they will fall outside the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented from being mixed into

Further, among the plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member (for example, the screw member N12) near the periphery of the pachinko game machine 1 ) is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the number of screw members (the number of parts) can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the dispensing device 200 . Incidentally, instead of the ground wire, a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 may also be used.

Further, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 to the game machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the game machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming part 201 can be firmly attached, and vibrations are less likely to occur, so loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

Further, the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the upper position of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the game machine frame 3 are screw members having a head portion NH with a small diameter that does not have a flange portion F. Even if it falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be easily dropped from the holes 271A to 271H, so that the screw member can be prevented from entering the dispenser 200. FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19(B) and 27, in the area below the first guide passage forming portion 202 on the game board 2 detachable from the frame 3 for the game machine, the fallen screw member is placed backward. Alternatively, an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down to the dispensing device 200 side is provided with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the cover body 220 It is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped on the upper wall portion 220H from jumping and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Also, although not shown, the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward from the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and drop onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220. The screw members are guided so as to flow backward or toward the dispensing device 200 side, thereby preventing the screw members falling on the upper wall portion 220H from falling into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A arranged below. can be prevented.

In addition, the cover body 220 is provided so as to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the production device having a movable body, and the production control board 12, so that the drive source of these is generated. A plurality of heat radiation holes 220B for releasing heat are formed in the upper part of the rear wall (see FIG. 6). It is preferably of a size that does not allow NH to be inserted. In addition, since there is a high possibility that screw members will fall from the upper holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H of the upper wall portion 220H arranged directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiation hole 220B is Preferably, it is formed at least at positions not corresponding to the holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H, or formed at a portion other than the upper wall portion 220H (for example, the rear wall portion). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the falling screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and adversely affecting the image display device 5, the performance device having the movable body, the performance control board 12, and the like.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modified example, and FIG. 29B is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion.

In the above-described embodiment, the guiding passage forming portion that forms the guiding passage for guiding the game balls of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 is the first ball tank forming portion extending to the left side so as to incline downward. It has a guiding passage forming portion 202 and a second guiding passage forming portion 204 extending downward from the lower left end portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, which is provided so as to partially cover the upper surface, is provided with a ball stopper member 340 protruding upward from the upper surface of the left end. In the above, the configuration in which the screw member N moving to the left on the cover portion 334 can be received and retained has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover portion of Modification 1 Like 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the second guide passage forming portion 204 below.

By doing so, the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen onto the cover portion 360 do not remain on the cover portion 360 when moving toward the left end side, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 Since the screw member N directly falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the left end portion of the screw member N, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 29B, in the cover portion 360 in which a recess 361 capable of retaining the screw member N is formed in the upper surface thereof, a second A cable CH may be provided so as to intersect the flowing direction of the game ball in the 1 guide passage forming portion 202 .

By doing so, the movement of the screw member N and the game ball P, which are retained in the recessed portion 361 but may move due to the inclination, can be restricted by the cable C so as to be retained.

(description of variations and applications)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, screw members N1 to 6 and N11 to 16 for attaching the mounting member 223 and the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 of the pachinko game machine 1, Screw members (not shown) attached to other parts of the game machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks that make up the game island, and various devices (for example, , replenishment device 150, etc.) and the like have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. All screw members such as screw members that have remained in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason such as forgetting to install them during maintenance at the place can be targeted, but at least they have been installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in advance. It is preferable that the screw member can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a storage portion capable of storing game media, the sphere tank forming portion 201 formed in a box-like shape with an open upper surface by the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion B is applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the storage portion can store game balls, the front-rear dimension is larger than the front-rear dimension of the first guide passage-forming portion 202 like the ball tank-forming portion 201 described above. It does not have to be long, and the front-to-rear dimension may be substantially the same as or shorter than that of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In addition, as long as the game balls supplied from the supply device 150 can be received, the upper surface does not necessarily have to be open.

In the above-described embodiment, the payout device 200 capable of paying out game balls with a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit capable of paying out game media, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a payout device that can pay out game balls by members other than sprockets.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B serve as the guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. Although the configuration in which the groove-shaped first guide passage forming portion 202 is applied is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide is composed of a tubular member having an opening formed in a part of the upper surface. It may be a passage forming portion, and the shape, size, and the like can be variously changed. In addition, the width dimension (front-rear dimension) of the ball tank forming part 201 may be substantially the same or larger, and the game balls may be guided so as to flow down in a plurality of rows.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion capable of storing game balls and the first guide passage whose upper surface is open and which guides the game balls in the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the form in which the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to be formed is integrally formed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 are separately formed. The members may be integrally formed by assembling them with screw members or the like. In this case, the threaded member for assembling the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is also subject to the threaded member of the present invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the screw member can enter from the top opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 The screw member may enter through a hole or a notch formed on the vertical wall side. In addition, when a screw member may be mixed in the second guide passage forming portion 204, a predetermined restricting portion for restricting the fall of the screw member to the second guide passage forming portion 204, or the second guide passage forming portion 204 A specific restricting portion or the like for restricting the movement of the dropped screw member to the dispenser 200 may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover parts provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire area of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be covered with the cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover portion that covers a partial region of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be configured by a member separate from the first guide passage forming portion 202, It may be integrally formed with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. In other words, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance in a square tubular shape.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is retained on the cover portion as a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314, 324, 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the embodiments in which the elongated holes 316A to 316C as the holes that allow the thread to be inserted, the grooves 326A to 326C and the recess 336 as the recesses are applied, the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member A fall restriction part (drop obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the fall from the cover part, and a movement restriction part (movement obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the movement of the screw member on the cover part Alternatively, it may be a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall from the cover portion to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Note that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting falling or movement may be not only the protrusions and recesses, but also magnets capable of attracting metal screw members, adhesive parts capable of adhering screw members, and the like.

In other words, the predetermined limit portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 , 324 , 334 onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 is Not only those that make it impossible to fall, but also those that make it difficult to fall.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of specific restricting portions are provided in the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to restrict the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200 is restricted ( Alternatively, it may be a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of inhibiting movement. It should be noted that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting the movement to the dispensing device 200 side is not limited to the protrusions and recesses, but may be a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering the screw member, or the like. However, it is preferable to provide them at positions that do not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, the corners between the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B, which are not in contact with the game ball).

That is, the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202 for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is the dispensing device 200 for the screw member. If the movement to the side can be restricted, the movement of the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 side is not necessarily disabled, and the movement can be made difficult. Anything is fine.

Further, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (restricted, inhibited) by the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the movement is restricted. There is a high possibility that the screw member that is restricted and stays in the first guide passage restricts the downflow of the game ball, resulting in ball clogging. When ball clogging occurs, the replenishment error notification is executed as described above, so that the game hall clerk or the like opens the game machine frame 3 to form the ball tank forming part 201 on the back or the first guide passage. There is a high possibility that the state of the game ball in the section 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member remains in the first guide passage forming portion 202 without moving to the dispensing device 200, it becomes easier for the store clerk or the like to identify that the ball clogging was caused by the screw member. Appropriate measures can be taken.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, all of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H have a size that allows the screw member to drop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes may not be capable of dropping the screw member. Moreover, the shape and size of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary and can be changed in various ways without being limited to the above-described forms.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the production control board 12 are applied as the first board attached to the lower position than the first guide passage forming part 202, but the present invention is limited to this. Other substrates such as relay substrates may also be targeted.

In the above-described embodiment, the terminal substrate 210 is applied as the second substrate attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the present invention is not limited to this. , other substrates such as a relay substrate may be used as the second substrate.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are exemplified by the form in which the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are accommodated are attached to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various substrates as the first substrate may be attached directly to the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 without interposing the substrate case.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are configured such that the board cases 11A and 12A in which each board is accommodated are screw members N20 and N21, that is, screw members are used. The terminal board 210 as the second board is attached to the game board 2 by an attachment method, using locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members, that is, Although a form in which the board mounting frame 211 is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may include attachment means, adhesion means using an adhesive or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is provided around the first guide passage forming portion 202 to restrict the screw member moving toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As a special restricting portion for making the first guiding passage forming portion 202 of the screw member, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) the fall of, a movement regulating portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) movement of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, , a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can drop out of the first guide passage forming portion 202, or the like. In addition, as a means capable of restricting or inhibiting the falling or movement of the first guide passage forming portion 202, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member and a magnet capable of adhering the screw member. It may be an adhesive portion or the like.

In other words, the special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the detached screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not only the portion that disables the dropping of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, Any material can be used as long as it makes it difficult to fall. For example, a convex portion as a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) and a concave portion or a hole as a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) may be provided at predetermined positions of the upper wall portion 225A or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in which the concave portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, etc., are provided as the special restricting portion is in the vicinity of the front standing wall portion 203B. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least it is provided in the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 203B as long as it is between the mounting portion (mounting hole) to which the screw member is mounted and the guide passage forming portion. For example, it may be provided at a position closer to the attached portion than the guide passage forming portion between the attached portion and the guide passage forming portion of the screw member.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first Although the form which applied the ball stop member 340 which can change to the 1st state which makes the game ball of the guidance passage formation part 202 flow down, and the 2nd state which makes it difficult or impossible to flow down was illustrated, this invention It is not limited to this, and any member provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the inclined direction (lower side of the inclination) of the cover portion 334 may restrict the movement of the screw member even if it does not have a ball stopper function. It may be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, or a wiring retainer that can (or obstruct).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is provided on the payout device 200 side in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the specifying portion may be provided at the end portion of the dispensing device 200 side of the cover portions 314 and 324 as long as it is provided at the dispensing device 200 side end portion of one cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is configured by a member separate from the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific portion (a ball stop portion) may be integrally formed with a part of the member that constitutes the cover portion 334 .

Further, in the above embodiment, as an example of the locking portion, the flange portion F (washer) having a larger diameter than the head portion NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head portion NH However, the present invention is not limited to this, instead of the flange portion F, a washer or the like that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member may be used, or the head Also included are the anti-rotation portion of the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive agent, and the like. Moreover, the threaded member is not limited to one that can be attached with a tool such as a screwdriver, but may be a thumbscrew, or includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as the storage portion is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by the screw members N11 to N14 having the flange portion F as the locking portion to form the ball tank. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3 are designed so as to fall outside the first guiding passage forming portion 202 even if they come off the game machine frame 3. , the first guiding passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 are mounted below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the position is above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201, for example, it may be displaced in the horizontal direction from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201. If the screw member is attached at a non-directly above position, it is possible to prevent the screw member from directly falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Further, the dropped screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guiding portion (for example, a concave groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A). good too.

Further, the predetermined restriction portion, the specific restriction portion, the special restriction portion, and the specific portion in the above-described embodiments are not only the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, but also the pachinko game such as game islands. Although the embodiment of restricting or regulating (obstructing) the movement of the screw member other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the screw member is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. Restrict or restrict the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the dispensing device 200. It is preferably formed in a size and shape that allow (inhibition).

(Characteristic part 053SG)
Next, the form for implementing the game machine in the characterizing portion 053SG according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 30-1 to 30-24.

The game machine in the characteristic part 053SG is a pachinko game machine or a slot machine installed in a game hall or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. Equipped with a game control board. As the game machine described below, the pachinko game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment can be applied, and the main board 11 of the above-described embodiment can be applied as the game control board, and the effect control board 12 can be applied as the effect control board. is.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected with a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors for detecting input conditions according to the progress of the game. Input components include, for example, detection switches that detect operations by the player, detection switches that detect the passage of game media such as game balls and medals, sensors that specify the positions of movable objects used in games such as reels, detection switches used for various settings such as the degree of advantage of the door, and detection switches for detecting door opening, abnormalities, and the like.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is equipped with an input circuit that detects the input signal from these input components, and the detection status of the input signal from the input component by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and used for game control by the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of output components such as indicators, LEDs, motors, solenoids, etc., which perform output control according to the progress of the game. Output components include, for example, a display that displays according to the lottery result, a display that displays the progress of the game and the state of the gaming machine, a display that instructs the player on the operation mode, and a value owned by the player. , an LED that indicates the game state, an LED that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality, a motor, a solenoid, and the like that operate movable parts used in the game, such as reels and variable winning devices.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. , the game control microcomputer transmits output data to the output circuit, thereby controlling the output components according to the progress of the game.

In addition, the game control microcomputer, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected via a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The transmission of the output data of is through a shared data bus.

Also, not all input circuits are connected via a shared data bus, but some input circuits are connected directly to the game control microcomputer without a data bus, and are connected to a shared data bus. Input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through.

The output circuits are all connected via a shared data bus. The configuration may be such that the output data is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without passing through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to an external output terminal, and the output data from the game control microcomputer is output to the external device as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance of the game machine using the output data output as.

Next, the game control board provided in the gaming machine of the present invention will be explained using the following Examples 1 to 3.

The structure of the game control board in Example 1 will be described. The game control board has electronic components mounted on one surface and no electronic components mounted on the other surface, and has a configuration in which the terminals of the electronic components are soldered. The surface is called a mounting surface, and the surface on which no electronic component is mounted and terminals of the electronic component are soldered is called a soldering surface.

FIG. 30-2 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-3 is a diagram showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating printed board. Consists of In addition, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes passing through the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board are configured with conductors so as to appropriately connect the through holes. A plurality of wiring patterns are formed. In addition, in the area where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board, a ground area is formed by an insulating area made of an insulator and a conductor and forming a ground. The ground area is a solid ground formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board.

As shown in FIG. 30-2, wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are arranged on the mounting surface in a larger proportion than wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction, and on the other hand, as shown in FIG. , more wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are arranged than wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are concentrated on the soldering surface. Designs such as bypassing wiring patterns can be reduced as much as possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-3, the wiring pattern arranged on the solder surface has many wires extending in the same horizontal direction as the long side, so the wiring pattern distance is longer than the wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the soldering surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern placed on the soldering surface is obstructed by the electronic components. is avoided.

Further, when branching the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, one of the branched wiring patterns is formed on the solder surface and the other is formed on the mounting surface through the through holes. One wiring pattern of the branch destination is detoured, and the one wiring pattern of the branch destination and the other wiring pattern do not cross each other on the same plane.

FIG. 30-4 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in the present embodiment in which the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the aforementioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components having one or more terminal rows each composed of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components having these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, in the horizontal direction. As mentioned above, on the mounting surface, there is a large percentage of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction, and electronic components with terminal rows are often arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, arranged in the horizontal direction. By doing so, it is possible to directly connect the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction to the terminal rows arranged in the horizontal direction without changing the direction of the wiring pattern.

30-4, the input circuit and the output circuit among the electronic components having a terminal row are formed in a rectangular shape and provided with a recessed notch on one of the short sides, and on the surface The model number is printed so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. As shown in FIG. 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in FIG. 30-4 and the model number is printed from left to right. 30-4, the notch faces right and the model number is printed from right to left. It is possible to specify whether the circuit is present or whether it is an output circuit.

FIG. 30-5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit as described above. . The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIG. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 30-6, the data bus, input circuits, output circuits, and other electronic components are connected to a wiring pattern formed so as to branch out to the mounting surface side through through holes and extend vertically in the vertical direction. connected by

When connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits separated in the horizontal direction through the data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the horizontal direction. It is connected to a data bus on the surface, branches to a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending vertically toward the electronic component through a through hole at a position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and it is possible to efficiently connect the game control microcomputer and the electronic parts separated in the horizontal direction. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less likely to be affected by noise from the electronic components. Since the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the hole is used for connection, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened, and the influence of noise from the electronic components during this period is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction forming the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but divided into a plurality of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is an antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed shorter than the length (λ (bus clock)/2). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern forming the data bus from having an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock and unintentionally emitting radio waves due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length of the antenna is half the length corresponding to the bus clock, it may reflect off the surface of the substrate and cause strong resonance. The lengths (L1 to L8) are formed to a length that is not half the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock. Emission of radio waves is also prevented.

In addition, the bus clock varies depending on the game control microcomputer and the oscillator to be installed, but the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) depends on the bus clock, which is the maximum frequency assumed among them. The length of the antenna is shorter than the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance, and the length of the antenna is less than half the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock that has the maximum frequency. Therefore, even when data is transmitted with a bus clock frequency lower than the expected maximum frequency, unintended radio waves are prevented from being generated.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns forming a data bus are arranged in an oblique right direction or an oblique left direction. They are connected across wiring patterns extending in different directions. Further, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction and the wiring pattern in the oblique right direction or the oblique left direction are connected while being bent at an obtuse angle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-5, through holes (A to F shown in FIG. 30-5) provided on oblique wiring patterns that connect a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns are used for mounting. Wiring patterns on the surface side (wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in FIG. 30-6) are branched, and oblique wiring patterns that connect the divided horizontal wiring patterns to each other. are used to branch the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus.

In addition, in the game control board in the first embodiment, in order to make the length of the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction shorter than the antenna length that maximizes resonance, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns, and a plurality of In this configuration, the horizontal wiring patterns divided into two are connected to each other by oblique wiring patterns formed on the same soldering surface. In other words, horizontal wiring patterns are alternately formed on the soldering surface and the mounting surface so that the horizontal wiring pattern length is shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized. Also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction at the point where the wiring pattern is switched from the soldering surface or the mounting surface to the other surface. , the wiring patterns forming the data bus can be branched without intersecting on the same plane.

Figure 30-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, Figure 30-8 is formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area;

As shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, the ground area is formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and soldering surface of the game control board. The ground area formed on the game control board comprises a first ground area and a second ground area electrically separated via an insulating area. In both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground area is formed in the left area of the game control board, and the second ground area is formed in the right area of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-7, a wiring pattern that transmits a low voltage (Vcc (+5 V) in this embodiment) signal such as a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, an output circuit, etc. is connected. Electronic components (low-voltage components) are mounted on the left area where the first ground area is formed, and ground terminals of the low-voltage components are connected to the first ground area. On the other hand, electronic parts (high voltage parts) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high voltage (VLD (+24 V) in this embodiment) signals are connected, such as drive circuits for operating motors, solenoids, etc. It is mounted on the right area where two ground areas are formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground area. This prevents unintended reverse flow of current from the high voltage component to the low voltage component via the ground area. In addition, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on opposite side sides of the game control board, interference with each other is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-9, a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, current is prevented from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, an insulating region in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. The ground area and the second ground area are electrically separated. Further, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed so as to overlap each other, and the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface are formed so as to overlap each other. Since the insulating region that separates the ground regions and the insulating region that separates the first ground region and the second ground region on the solder surface are also formed so as to overlap each other, from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface Mutual interference is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

30-10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, FIG. 30-11 is a connector formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a peripheral wiring pattern, and FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in this embodiment is housed in the board case.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the game control board has a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 mounted near the lower side of the mounting surface for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board. In the wiring from the game control board, there are a signal that triggers the lottery, a signal that changes the set value that defines the advantage for the player such as the probability of the lottery, and a signal that changes the set value. Wiring for inputting or outputting signals related to the degree of advantage in the game, such as signals, signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring for inputting the detection signal of the error cancellation operation, backup power supply wiring as a supply line for

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. -11, it is connected to a wiring pattern formed on the solder side, that is, the side opposite to the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connector such as the connector number is printed therearound. ing. The information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, and may be configured to print the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 30-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder surface passes through the through holes at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminals, and the wiring on the mounting surface passes through. connected to the pattern. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in FIGS. 30-10 and 30-11 are through holes to which the terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are It is provided at the place where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to connect from the solder surface to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and 30-12(B), the game control board is attached to the game machine while being accommodated in the board case. The substrate case can be sealed by a one-way screw, sealing seal, welding, or the like, and once sealed, it is difficult to open without leaving a trace. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the game machine in a state where it is housed in the board case, it has a structure that prevents fraudulent use of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 30-12 (A) and (B), the substrate case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 when the game control substrate is housed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the area covered by the covering portion of the board case of the mounting surface of the game control board, and the wiring pattern is formed avoiding the area. there is The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes so that wiring from the outside can be connected.

Even when the game control board is housed in the board case in this way, since the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to wiring from the outside, a slight gap is generated around the connectors CN1 to CN7. are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and are not directly connected to the solder surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite side, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is short-circuited from the periphery of the portion where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the substrate case. Fraudulent acts such as disconnection are prevented.

In addition, the periphery of the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered by the covering portion of the board case, and the area covered by the covering portion includes wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. No wiring patterns including patterns are formed, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface in areas other than the covering portion, It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 from the periphery of the portions where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case.

FIG. 30-13 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-13, Vcc (+5V) is generated by the power board and connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. In addition, Vcc (+5V) is branched from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer on the power supply board, and is connected to the charging capacitor through the backflow prevention diode, and the backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor A line branched between is connected to the backup power supply input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While the power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as a drive power source for the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+5V) is stopped, so that the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer, The game control microcomputer is supplied with the backup power supply VBB so that the data stored in the RAM of the game control microcomputer is retained. In this embodiment, the backup power supply is configured to be supplied from a power supply board outside the game control board, but may be configured to be supplied from a circuit provided within the game control board.

30-14 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-15 is formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the soldered surface and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface;

As shown in FIG. 30-14, on the soldering surface of the game control board, wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power and wiring patterns VBB for supplying backup power are provided as wiring patterns constituting power supply lines. , are formed. The wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3, as shown in FIGS. 30-14 and 30-15, are configured by a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB, as shown in FIG. 30-14, consists only of wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer only through the wiring pattern formed on the soldering surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB supplied with the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to detour the electronic parts mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so that noise from the outside can be reduced. This prevents the data stored in the RAM from being corrupted by noise.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, on the mounting surface, a solid ground is formed in the portion where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side is less susceptible to noise because the solid ground formed on the mounting surface blocks noise. Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power. In the region corresponding to , the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, especially the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is formed at a position where there are few crossing points. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied from the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is suppressed as much as possible.

In the present embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power supply is located in the corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power supply. is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side. For example, a wiring pattern that transmits a signal related to the player's profit is closer to the mounting surface than a wiring pattern that transmits a signal that is not directly related to the player's history, such as a signal for controlling output parts. In the corresponding area, the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is formed at a position where there are few crossing points, so that the signal formed on the mounting surface side can be used for transmission. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern, through which the signal related to the profit of the player is transmitted from the wiring pattern, is suppressed as much as possible.

In addition, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern that transmits the reset signal to the game control microcomputer and the wiring pattern that gives the operation clock to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. A place where a wiring pattern for signal transmission intersects a wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side in a corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than a wiring pattern for transmitting other signals. By adopting a configuration in which the noise is reduced, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side and transmitting signals of relatively high importance is minimized. suppressed.

FIG. 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the slot machine. The slot machine is equipped with game parts related to games such as a liquid crystal display, an effect control board for controlling effects, a reel unit consisting of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit for paying out medals. When the game control board is attached to the slot machine, the game control board has the mounting surface side, that is, the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed on the game component side. Mounted to be positioned. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine. When the pachinko gaming machine is installed in a game arcade, it is often installed in such a manner that the back faces of other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines face each other. When the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine, the game control board has a mounting surface side, that is, a surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed. It is attached so that it is arranged on the device side. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other game machines on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

(Effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a ratio of the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) different from the first direction (horizontal direction) is higher than that of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface. When the wiring pattern extending in the (vertical direction) and the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) intersect, design such as detouring the wiring pattern can be reduced as much as possible.

The game control board of this embodiment is a quadrilateral consisting of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in a first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in a second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed along the shape of the game control board without waste.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that an electronic component having a terminal row consisting of a plurality of terminals is arranged so that the terminal rows are arranged in the second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (horizontal direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment includes a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized in that the electronic component is mounted only on the mounting surface and the electronic component is not mounted on the soldering surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to form a wiring pattern in the second direction (horizontal direction), in which the distance can be long on the solder surface, without being obstructed by the electronic component.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the wiring pattern includes a wiring pattern branching from one wiring pattern to two wiring patterns, one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface, The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to detour one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination, or to cross the one wiring pattern at the branch destination with the other wiring pattern on the same plane. can be formed.

(Effect 2)
The game control board of the present embodiment connects the first terminal (terminal of the game control microcomputer) and the second terminal (terminal of the input circuit, output circuit) separated in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and a specific signal ( A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting input data and output data) is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed of a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction). Each linear wiring pattern formed by division and extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) has a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns each composed of a straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and a straight line extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) is formed. Each wiring pattern is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus ) can be prevented from becoming an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), and unintended radio waves can be prevented from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). . According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by a wiring pattern extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). Alternatively, wiring patterns may be formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) may be alternately formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Also in such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) and the other wiring pattern. It is characterized by branching into According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be preferably branched by utilizing the space between one wiring pattern extending in the specific direction and another wiring pattern.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data) It is characterized in that it is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2). According to such a configuration, since the length of the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data), It is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted even if a signal is transmitted by

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized in that the length is not 1/2 (λ/4). According to such a configuration, the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the substrate. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves.

(Effect 3)
The game control board of the present embodiment includes a first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected, and a second voltage (VDL (+24V)). A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of is connected is mounted, the first electronic component (low-voltage component) is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component ( The high voltage component) is characterized by being connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulator. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V) is transmitted) is connected is connected to the first ground area, and the second voltage is A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of (VDL (+24V)) is connected is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion (insulating region). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended reverse flow of current through the ground.

In addition, in the game control board of the present embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected is connected to the first ground area, A second electronic component (high-voltage component), to which a wiring pattern that transmits a signal of a second voltage (VDL (+24 V)) is connected, is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which there is a large difference in the current flowing through the wiring pattern that connects the first electronic component and the second electronic component, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component is connected to the first ground area. It may be configured to be connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Even if the current difference between the patterns is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground area, so that an unintended reverse current flows through the ground. can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a current from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area even if a potential difference occurs temporarily between the first ground area and the second ground area due to the capacitor. .

In the game control board of the present embodiment, a first ground area is formed on one side (left side), a second ground area is formed on the other side (right side) opposite to one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component ) is mounted in the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground area. According to such a configuration, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, they can be prevented from interfering with each other even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) in which no wiring pattern is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area is formed on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. is characterized by With such a configuration, the insulation between the first ground region and the second ground region can be enhanced.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on at least one of the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground area and the Insulation between the second ground regions can be enhanced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface are formed in areas corresponding to each other. and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) of the solder surface are also formed in corresponding areas. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent mutual interference even if a potential difference is temporarily generated from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface.

(Effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is attached to the game machine while being housed in the board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals of (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted, but to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite solder surface. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the periphery where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring related to the advantage of the game (signal for changing the setting value to a changeable state, changing the setting value (wiring for inputting or outputting signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent cheating related to game advantage.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and wiring patterns are formed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Since the wiring pattern is not formed, by displaying information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this portion, the portion where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface can be effectively used.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the board case has a covering portion covering the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are: It is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface in the region covered by the covering portion. With such a configuration, wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are not formed on the mounting surface even in the periphery of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7). (Connectors CN1 to CN7) can be reliably prevented from fraudulent actions such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the exposed portions.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

(Effect 5)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. The microcomputer for is capable of holding the stored contents of the storage means (RAM) by a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) is a game control microcomputer The wiring pattern (VBB) to be supplied to is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, since the wiring pattern that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, it bypasses the electronic components. Since the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is difficult to receive noise from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the data stored in the storage means (RAM) from being damaged by the noise.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the mounting surface side is attached so as to be placed on the side of the game components (liquid crystal display, effect control board for controlling effects, etc.) related to the game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is attached so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the other game device (another game machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer from the influence of noise emitted from other game machines.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area provided with the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer on the solder surface is solid. A ground is formed. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is more It is characterized in that there are few intersections with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side as much as possible.

Embodiment 1 of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It goes without saying that

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board for controlling a game has been described. The configuration according to the present invention may also be applied to a board for controlling game media and the provision of game values, a board for relaying between boards, and the like.

The structure of the game control board in Example 2 will be described. As in the first embodiment, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in the second embodiment is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in the first embodiment, and here, mainly the configuration different from the game control board in the first embodiment will be described. .

30-18 is a view showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and FIG. 30-19 is a view showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this example.

As shown in FIGS. 30-18 and 30-19, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating printed board. Consists of A plurality of through holes are formed in the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed in the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. In addition, an insulating area and a ground area are formed in the area where the wiring pattern of the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board is not formed.

Also in the game control board in the second embodiment, similarly to the game control board in the first embodiment, an input circuit and an output circuit are mounted. A concave notch is provided on one side, and the model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the direction of the notch and the direction of printing the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the left side in the figure and the model number is printed from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the right side in the figure and the model number is printed. It is arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits by the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. there is

FIG. 30-20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus that is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIGS. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern formed to branch to the mounting surface side through the through hole and extend vertically in the vertical direction. .

When connecting the game control microcomputer and the laterally separated input and output circuits via the data bus, first, the terminal of the game control microcomputer extends in the lateral direction on the data bus on the solder surface. at the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, branch to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending in the vertical direction toward the input circuit or output circuit through the through hole, and connect to the input circuit or output circuit becomes. Therefore, there is no need to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the laterally separated input and output circuits. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components. are connected by wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface side through through-holes, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened and is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components during this period.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-22, the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than any input circuit or output circuit connected to the data bus. This makes it difficult for noise on the data bus to affect the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-20, on the game control board, connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board are mounted in the vicinity of the upper side in the figure, and a data bus is installed. The wiring pattern is formed in an area near the lower side of the game control board in the figure, that is, in an area near the other side opposite to the one side on which the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, a wide area for mounting electronic parts such as input circuits and output circuits is ensured between the data bus and the connectors CN10 to CN17 for signal input/output with electronic parts outside the game control board. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board has an input signal from the first input component, which has relatively low importance among the input components used for game control (not triggering the lottery). A first input circuit that detects the input of a sensor or switch detection signal, etc.), an input signal from a second input component that is more important than the first input component (sensor or switch detection signal that triggers the lottery, an advantageous A second input circuit that detects input such as a detection signal that changes the set value that defines the speed, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, the operation of the movable parts such as solenoids and motors according to the progress of the game A first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that performs the second output that displays according to the progress of the game, such as various indicators and LEDs, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer A second output circuit that outputs output signals to parts, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, is mounted on the game control board, and the payout rate when playing the game for a certain period of time, etc. A third output circuit is implemented for outputting an output signal to a performance indicator for displaying performance.

A first output circuit, a first output circuit, a second output circuit, and a third output circuit among these input circuits and output circuits are connected to a data bus, and transmission of input data and transmission of output data are performed via the data bus. is done.

As shown in FIG. 30-20, the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the solder surface branches to the mounting surface side through through holes at multiple points, and is vertically mounted on the mounting surface. It is connected to the wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface through the through hole at the position N in the figure is connected to the terminal of the third output circuit. Wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface through through holes at positions O and P in the figure are connected to the terminals of the first output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the drawing is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branches on the mounting surface. The remaining wiring pattern is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side once through the through hole at the position R in the figure, and is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting side through the through hole again at the position S in the figure. and connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the input circuit of the input circuit and output circuit connected by a shared data bus has a wiring pattern length from the output circuit to the game control microcomputer. It is connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used for game control is less susceptible to noise and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among a plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, an output signal is output to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game. has a shorter wiring pattern length to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. are connected to the data bus so that Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like, which affects the operation of the movable portion according to the progress of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among the plurality of output circuits connected by the shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance indicator is Data so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the display (second output component) that performs display according to the progress of the game Connected to a bus. For this reason, it is difficult to tamper with the contents of the performance display by arranging illegal parts or the like.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 30-21, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through-hole at the position Q in the drawing, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side, changes according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device It is connected to an external output terminal for outputting to. In this way, by utilizing the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side. and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface in order to branch to each wiring pattern connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern is formed simply.

The wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side, outputs an output signal to a second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. It may be configured such that it is connected to terminals of two output circuits, and branched on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to an output circuit for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. Even with such a configuration, it is desirable to use the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through-holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, so that the output corresponding to the progress of the game can be performed on the mounting surface side. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device, it is connected to a plurality of output circuits. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface for branching to each wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

Among the input circuits, the second input circuit is not connected to the data bus and transmits input data directly to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole once at the position of T in the figure, U in the figure It is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole at the position of , and is connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

Thus, the first input circuit for detecting the input of the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for game control, communicates with the game control microcomputer via the data bus. A second input circuit that is connected but detects input of an input signal from a second input component having higher importance than the first input component is not connected to the data bus and is directly connected without going through the data bus. It is designed to be connected to a game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is transmitted through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without intermediary, the input data based on the important input signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. It will be transmitted.

(Effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit for transmitting the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for the control of the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, the game control microcomputer Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the input Data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

The game control board of this embodiment is configured such that the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. It may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than, and with such a configuration, based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the input circuit, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first output circuit for outputting an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from a game control microcomputer; a second output circuit for outputting an output signal to a second output component that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, the first output circuit comprising: It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game outputs the second output that displays according to the progress of the game. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the part, the output data is affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the operation of the movable part according to the progress from being affected.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment is configured such that the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit. A second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display, and a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game. Also, since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so as to be short, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise, etc., and affecting the display according to the progress of the game. can.

Also, like the game control board of the first embodiment, a first ground area where low voltage components are mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and a first ground area where high voltage components are mounted on the right side. When two ground areas are formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game often belongs to the high voltage component. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the second ground area and outputs an output signal to the second output part that displays according to the progress of the game, is often mounted in the first ground area because it belongs to the low voltage parts. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting the second output circuit in the area, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground area together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, thereby preventing a load from being applied to the second output circuit. can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. Electronic parts are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected from the data bus through through holes is used to output output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface. The wiring pattern is branched into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for playing the game and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the solder surface. Since the wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device are branched, in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the soldering surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. A first input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first input component used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and a first input circuit used for controlling the game control microcomputer A second input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the 2 input components to the game control microcomputer, and a first output component and a second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer It includes a first output circuit and a second output circuit that output an output signal, and the first input circuit, the first output circuit and the second output circuit are connected to a game control microcomputer via a data bus. , the second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to a game control microcomputer without a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is used for game control without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. .

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the data bus from being affected by noise from electronic components.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected to each other by a branched wiring pattern on the mounting surface opposite to the soldering surface on which the data bus is formed through through-holes. and According to such a configuration, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus faces one side of the game control board. It is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side) than the other side. According to such a configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the substrate area can be effectively utilized. .

In the game control board of this embodiment, a performance indicator for displaying the performance of the gaming machine is mounted, and the third output circuit for outputting an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to another indicator. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display device, the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the other display device to the game control microcomputer Since the wiring pattern is short, it is possible to make it difficult to modify display contents by arranging illegal parts.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the component orientations are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and the output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Also, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effects as those described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example exemplified for the first embodiment can also be applied to the second embodiment.

The structure of the game control board in Example 3 will be described. As in the first and second embodiments, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. It should be noted that the game control board in Example 3 is characterized by the structure of the mounted electronic components and the through holes, and here, the structure of the electronic components and the through holes will be described.

30-23 are perspective views showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic component, and (B) is a , and a perspective view from below of the specific electronic component.

The specified electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and below the specified electronic component, as shown in FIGS. For the purpose, fixing terminals 1 and 2 that are not used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the substrate and are used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, is provided. Moreover, the model number of the specific electronic component is stamped or printed above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connection terminal is exemplified as the specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be applied as the specific electronic component. An electronic component having only connection terminals without fixing terminals may be applied as the specific electronic component.

The through-holes provided in the game control board consist of normal through-holes and specific through-holes. As shown in Fig. 30-24(A), a normal through-hole is plated with copper, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole. It is a through hole that conducts at On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-24(B), a specific through-hole is a through-hole in which the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole is not copper-plated and the through-hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the soldering surface. be.

Normally, when soldering to the through-hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in Fig. 30-24(A), since the inside of the through-hole is copper-plated, the solder inside the through-hole does not reach the mounting surface. Although it will flow up, when soldering to a specific through hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in FIG. The solder does not flow up and the solder does not reach the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 through the specific through holes, inserting the connection terminals through the normal through holes, and soldering them from the solder surface side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted through the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, so that the solder does not reach the mounting surface. It is possible to prevent troubles such as the model number printed or stamped above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by the solder due to excessive rise to the mounting surface side where the component is mounted.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by solder, even if the part is illegally replaced, there is a risk that it will not be discovered. Also, if the model number is hidden in the model test, it will not be possible to specify the component configuration, and the test will not be approved. There is a risk that the terminal will not be able to receive the terminal, or that installation at the amusement arcade will not be approved because the model number cannot be confirmed at the time of installation at the amusement arcade. Such a problem can be prevented by fixing with .

On the other hand, since the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for transmitting signals or electric power of specific electronic components, problems arise even if the electrical connection is weakened when they are soldered to the specific through-holes. never On the other hand, the connection terminals are usually inserted through the through-holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, so that the solder reaches the mounting surface to ensure electrical connection.

(Effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A specific through-hole is formed in which a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components is fixed by inserting a terminal into the through-hole penetrating the surface and the soldering surface and soldering the through-hole and the terminal, The specific through-hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface does not conduct and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through-hole does not allow electrical continuity between the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the soldering surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. In this case, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and causing a problem.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the terminals for fixing the specific electronic parts (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. According to such a configuration, the specific through-holes are soldered to the specific through-holes for fixing the specific electronic component (fixing terminals 1 and 2), so that the solder reaches the mounting surface. By not doing so, problems do not occur even if the electrical connection becomes weak.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2) for fixing the specific electronic parts are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. Terminals (connecting terminals) that propagate signals and power of components may be inserted and soldered. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short-circuiting of a terminal that propagates a signal or power of a specific electronic component with another terminal.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or stamped) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the model number of the specific electronic part from being hidden due to excessive solder rising to the mounting surface side where the electronic component is mounted.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this third embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. In addition, the same or similar configurations as those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Moreover, the modifications illustrated in the first and second embodiments are also applicable to the third embodiment.

(Invention of characteristic part 053SG)
As described above, the characteristic portion 053SG includes the following inventions. That is, conventionally, for example, as described in JP-A-2016-93428, etc., game machines such as pachinko game machines and slot machines generally have a board on which electronic devices are mounted, A substrate of this type has been proposed in which data is input/output using a single data bus between control means such as a CPU and other electronic equipment. In this type of substrate, there are various problems regarding the design of wiring patterns. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine in which the wiring pattern of the board is preferably formed, the game machine of (1) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the output circuit.
According to this feature, the input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means to the control means outputs to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the output circuit for outputting the signal, it is possible to prevent the input data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (2) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1),
The substrate (game control substrate) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine of (3) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected through a through-hole to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface on which the data bus is formed (solder surface) by a branched wiring pattern. Characterized by
According to this feature, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine of (4) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
Connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side) of the board (game control board), and the data bus is connected to the board (game control board). It is characterized in that it is formed in a region near the other side (lower side) facing the one side of the control board).
According to this feature, since an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector and the data bus, the board area can be effectively utilized.

The gaming machine of (5) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
A performance indicator for displaying the performance of the game machine is mounted on the board (game control board),
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is more likely than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to another indicator. (microcomputer) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern is short.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern up to the control means than the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the other indicators. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally alter the display content by arranging the

The gaming machine of (6) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
It is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the substrate so that the component directions are different.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The gaming machine of (7) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
The data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The game machine of (8) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the second output circuit (second output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game is connected to the second electronic component that displays the display according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the second output circuit for outputting the output signal, the output data is affected by noise and the like, so that the output data can move according to the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the operation of the unit from being affected.

The game machine of (9) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and is connected from the data bus through through holes. The first wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game on the first surface (mounting surface). and a second wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal) for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device.
According to this feature, the wiring pattern on the first surface connected to the data bus formed on the second surface through the through-hole is used to output the output according to the progress of the game on the first surface side. Since the output signal corresponding to the wiring pattern and the progress of the game is branched to the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, it is formed on the second surface to branch to the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern respectively. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The game machine of (10) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
A first input for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from a circuit (first input circuit) and a second electronic component (second input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control A second input circuit (second input circuit) to be transmitted to a microcomputer), and a third electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) (first output component, second output an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the component),
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without passing through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the control means without being affected by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit.

The game machine of (11) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the input circuit.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting an output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the input circuit for transmission to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The game machine of (12) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the first output circuit (first output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the second output circuit for outputting an output signal to the second electronic component that performs display according to the progress of the game is connected to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the first output circuit for outputting the output signal, the output data is affected by noise and the like, so that the display corresponding to the progress of the game is displayed. can be prevented from affecting

In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls circulated and lent out according to the player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state and the normal state. (For example, a game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a time-saving state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state), and can store game media (for example, game balls P) A storage section (for example, a ball tank forming section 201), a payout section (for example, a payout device 200) capable of paying out game media, and an upper surface that is open to guide the game media in the storage section to the payout section. a guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202 or a second guiding passage forming portion 204) that forms a guiding passage (for example, a first guiding passage or a second guiding passage); a cover portion (for example, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, and third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface; Predetermined limiting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, concave grooves 326A to 326C, concave portions 336 ) is provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24), and a specific restricting portion (for example, a hole 271A to 271H) are provided (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27), and the predetermined restriction portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recesses 336) are provided on the cover portion. game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game; Control information (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 41-2) production control means (for example, production control CPU120) that can control the production based on, from the normal state either the advantageous state or the special state When the number of times of the advantageous state that has occurred in the advantageous period (for example, the period of the continuous state) in which the control to the normal state has not been performed even once since the control was made to the normal state has reached a specific number (for example, the number of times the continuous state has been The predetermined numerical data can be updated from a first value (e.g., "0") to a second value (e.g., "1" or "2") when the first determination count is "5" or more. update means (e.g. CP 41-13), and when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the speed at which the game value is awarded in the unit period is reduced. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 41-13 and 41-21, the CPU 103 sets the ball output state flag value to “1” or “2” in the ball output state determination process, so that the jackpot game part for prolonging the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period), and the game control means transmits control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value. It can be transmitted to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 41-13, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing shown in FIG. portion), the effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, FIGS. 41-27 and 41- As shown in 28, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball payout state from the received ball payout state designation command in the notice effect determination processing, and uses the notice effect type determination table corresponding to the specified ball payout state. Part) game machine that can determine whether or not to execute the notice effect during variable display and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion. In addition, since the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restricting portion and the screw member can be kept in a state where it can always stay, the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion is prevented from falling into the guide passage forming portion. can do. In addition, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, adjustment is made to reduce the speed at which the game value is given. It is possible to prevent the gambling nature from being excessively increased due to the fact that the predetermined numerical data is the second value or not, so that the performance control can be executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

In other words, it is possible to make the game machine less likely to break down by preventing the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming part or the payout part, and adjusting the speed of giving the game value (for example, selecting a variation pattern) When the adjustment to make the variable display time longer than the case where the game value imparting speed is not reduced) is executed, an effect is performed according to the adjustment, so excessive game value is imparted in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest while preventing the That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that is hard to break down when installed in a game arcade, and that easily attracts the interest of players with a suitable gambling property.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guiding passage forming portion and the payout portion, and to prevent the gambling property from being excessively increased, and at the same time, it is possible to improve the game amusement. As, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state (high probability high base A game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a state and a low probability base state)), and is transmitted from a game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and the game control means Based on the control information (for example, the production control command shown in FIG. 41-2), production control means (for example, production control CPU 120), and from the normal state to the advantageous state or the special state When the number of times of the advantageous state occurring in the advantageous period (for example, the period of the continuous state) during which the control to the normal state has not been performed even once since being controlled to any one of them reaches a specific number (for example, the continuous state When the number of times is "5" or more, which is the first determination number of times), the predetermined numerical data is updated from a first value (eg, "0") to a second value (eg, "1" or "2") Possible update means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the ball-out state determination process shown in FIG. 41-13), and the game value given in the unit period when the predetermined numerical data is the second value (For example, as shown in FIG. 41-13 and FIG. (a part for prolonging the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game by setting the game control means to the second value); It is possible to transmit identifiable control information to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIG. part for executing the command control process shown in ), the effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, FIG. As shown in 41-27 and FIG. 41-28, the effect control CPU 120 receives the A ball payout state is specified from the ball payout state specifying command, and whether or not the notice play is executed during variable display and whether or not the notice play is executed using a table for deciding the type of notice play corresponding to the specified ball payout state and the notice play to be executed are determined. A portion that can determine the type of presentation) game machine. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

[form]
The game machine of form A1 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state (high probability high base state or A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a low probability base state)),
The number of times the advantageous state occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous state period) during which the normal state was never controlled to the normal state after being controlled from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the special state When the specified number of times is reached (for example, when the number of consecutive residences is "5" or more, which is the first judgment number), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example, "0"). (for example, "1" or "2") update means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 41-13) and the predetermined numerical data is the second value Sometimes, an adjustment means for adjusting the speed at which game values are awarded in a unit period is reduced (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-13 and 41-21, the CPU 103 may A part for extending the fanfare performance period, the interval period, and the ending performance period during the jackpot game by setting the state flag value to '1' or '2',
The updating means updates the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value when the termination condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the ball output status flag is set to "0" based on the variable display remaining count after judgment that was set to "1" as well becomes 0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment is executed to reduce the speed at which the game value is given. It is possible to prevent gambling from excessively increasing due to the addition of game value.

The gaming machine of the form A2 of the characterizing part 162SG is the gaming machine according to the form A1,
A gaming machine that executes variable display and can be controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display result is a specific result (for example, a big win),
The adjusting means is configured such that a variable display period of variable display executed when the predetermined numerical data is the second value is a variable display period of variable display executed when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. Adjust to be longer than the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 41-8, when the value of the ball output state flag is “1” or “2” (first high ball output state or second When it is in a high ball output state), the special figure variable display time in each variation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball output state flag is "0" (when it is in a low ball output state) ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the length of the variable display period makes it possible to lengthen the time interval of the advantageous state that occurs when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. The game value imparting speed can be reduced without reducing the game value imparted in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form A3 of characterizing part 162SG is the gaming machine according to form A1 or form A2,
The advantageous state includes a grantable period during which game value can be granted (for example, the period of each round game in which the big winning opening is open as shown in FIG. 41-20) and a grant during which game value cannot be granted. Impossible period (for example, as shown in FIG. 41-20, fanfare production period, interval period, ending production period in which the big winning opening is closed)
The adjusting means adjusts the advantageous state grant disable period controlled when the predetermined numerical data is the second value and the advantageous state controlled when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. (For example, as shown in FIG. 41-21, if the value of the ball output status flag is "1" or "2", the value of the ball output status flag is A part where the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending period are set longer during the jackpot game than in the case of "0"),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the non-granting period during which the game value is not granted is lengthened, so that the speed of granting the game value when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form A4 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A3,
Which of the first advantageous state (for example, the variable probability big win B) and the second advantageous state (for example, the variable probability big win A) in which the game value given is larger than the first advantageous state is the advantageous state? Advantageous state type determination means (for example, CPU 103 executes the process (step 162 SGS154) for determining the jackpot type in the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 41-16),
The adjusting means adjusts the rate at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determining means when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, and the predetermined numerical data is the first value. When the rate is higher than the rate at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determining means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 162SG-1, the ball output state is a high ball output state In this case, the part that lowers the determination ratio of the variable probability big hit A as the jackpot type and increases the determination ratio of the variable probability big hit B than when the ball output state is the low ball output state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the first advantageous state in which the game value to be awarded is small is likely to be determined, so the predetermined numerical data is the second value. Since the magnitude of the game value to be given can be reduced when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the speed of giving the game value can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the form A5 of the characterizing part 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A4,
When the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the rate at which the advantageous period end determining means determines the end of the advantageous period is adjusted so that when the predetermined numerical data is the first value is adjusted to be higher than the rate at which the end of the advantageous period is determined by the advantageous period end determination means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 162SG-2, the jackpot is higher in the high ball state than in the low ball state) The part that increases the percentage of determining the type to be a non-variable jackpot, and the part that increases the percentage of winning the falling lottery in the high ball state than in the low ball state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, it is easier to determine the end of the advantageous period, and it is easier to control to the normal state, so that the advantageous state continues through the special state. Since the number of times can be reduced, as a result, the speed at which the game value is given when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form A6 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A5,
The termination condition is that the number of occurrences of the advantageous state during the advantageous period after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the update means reaches the number of termination determinations. (For example, as shown in Modified Example 162SG-3, the first high-ball output condition is that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high-ball output state or the second high-ball output state. The part that controls the ball state and the second high ball state to the low ball state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value, the adjustment can be terminated when the advantageous state of the end determination count occurs in the advantageous period.

The gaming machine of form A7 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A6,
A gaming machine that executes variable display and can be controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display result is a specific result (for example, a big win),
The end condition is that the number of times of variable display executed after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the updating means reaches the number of times of end determination (for example, after determination "100", which is the value set as the remaining number of variable displays, becomes "0" by executing the variable display 100 times);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the adjustment can be terminated when the end determination count is variably displayed after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value.

The gaming machine of the form A8 of the characterizing part 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A7,
The termination condition is that the magnitude of the game value used in the game reaches the magnitude of termination determination after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the updating means. (For example, as shown in modification 162SG-4, after setting the value of the ball output state flag to "1", during the period of the continuous state state A part that sets the value of the output ball status flag to "0" based on the total number of game balls entering reaching a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value, the adjustment is terminated when the magnitude of the game value used in the game reaches the magnitude of the termination determination. can do.

The gaming machine of form A9 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A8,
storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding the value of the predetermined numerical data even when power supply to the game machine is stopped;
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, initialization means for initializing the storage contents of the storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. 41-11). When executing the game control main process shown, (step S3; N), based on the fact that the restoration condition is not established, the part that executes the processing of step S6a and step S6b),
with
When the memory contents of the storage means are initialized by the initialization means, the first value is set to the predetermined numerical data (for example, as shown in FIG. 41-11, the CPU 103 The part where "0" corresponding to the low ball output state is set as the value of the ball output state flag in the processing),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent adjustment from being performed at the start of power supply.

The gaming machine of the form A10 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A9,
A storage means (for example, a RAM 102) capable of holding the value of the predetermined numerical data even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
When the power supply to the game machine is started, the predetermined numerical data is restored based on the value of the predetermined numerical data held in the storage means (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated, the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. 41). When executing the game control main processing shown in -11, if the restoration condition is established (step S3; Y), execute the restoration processing (step S4) including the update processing of the ball output state flag by the backup data. If it was in a high ball output state at the time of a power failure, it will be restored to a high ball output state, and if it was in a low ball state at the time of a power failure, it will be restored to a low ball output state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the predetermined numerical data at the time of occurrence of the power failure is the second value, the adjustment can be continued when the power failure is restored.

The gaming machine of the form A11 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A10,
Notifying means capable of notifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIG. 41-13, in the CPU 103 ball-distributed state determination processing, the ball-distributed state flag is set in step S162SG06). After setting the value to "1", in the process of step 162SG08, the part that starts lighting the high-ball status notification LED 162SG071)
It is characterized by
It can be recognized that the adjustment is being performed by the predetermined numerical data being the second value.

The gaming machine of the form A12 of the characterizing part 162SG is the gaming machine according to the form A11,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Light emitting means having a plurality of light emitting units whose light emission is controlled by the game control means (for example, first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, high-out ball state notification LED 162SG071) and
The notification is performed by causing the light-emitting unit to emit light (for example, the part that notifies the high-ball state by lighting the high-ball state notification LED 162SG071),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform notification by light emission control common to other light emission units by the game control means.

The gaming machine of the form A13 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A12,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 41-2) Production control means (for example, production control CPU120) capable of controlling production based on,
with
The game control means can transmit control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 41-13, the CPU 103 Step 162 After executing the transmission setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162 SGS17, the portion for executing the command control processing shown in FIG. 35),
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 41-27 and 41-28 In addition, in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and variably displays using the notice effect type determination table according to the identified ball output state. Part that can decide whether to execute the advance notice effect and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be executed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of the form A14 of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A13,
A specific effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that can suggest that the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state is high, and a notice effect (for example, pre-reading notice effect) that foretells the execution of the specific effect. Execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
The effect executing means limits execution of the advance notice effect during a predetermined period before the predetermined numerical data is updated from the second value to the first value by the updating means (for example, FIG. 41- 23, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the post-determination variable display remaining count is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit count in the processing of step 162 SGS 242b of the pre-reading notice setting processing. If it is equal to or less than the look-ahead limit number of times (step 162 SGS242b; Y), the portion where the look-ahead notice effect is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from becoming inappropriate due to the adjustment not being executed due to the update of the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 31 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 33). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 33), and the special winning prize opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 31), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 33).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 33).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

32 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply substrate 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 35 as the special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 37 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 37 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 37 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to emit a prohibit command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 38 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 109SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 109SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 109SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The conventional game machine is a game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-99572 (Patent Document 1), which can notify the effect result by the operation of the movable body (execution of the specific effect) and can output the effect sound. Some have a speaker (sound output means).

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 can execute a suggestive effect suggesting that a specific effect will be executed by repeatedly operating the movable body in a period prior to executing the specific effect. It is conceivable to make the player pay attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed by executing the effect. Furthermore, in such a game machine, the repetitive motion of the movable body as the suggestive effect is terminated a predetermined period before the specific effect, and the type of effect sound output from the speaker is changed before and after the predetermined period ( It is conceivable to improve the amusement of the game by changing the type of the effect sound output from the speaker. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to be recognized by the movement of the movable body.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that facilitates recognition of changes in the type of effect sound before and after a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 40-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 109SG. As shown in FIG. 40-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic portion 109S, a movable body unit 109SG400 is provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof. .

The movable body unit 109SG400 has a base 109SG410 as shown in FIG. 40-3(A). The first movable body 109SG401 is located at the center of the base 109SG410 in the lateral width direction, the second movable body 109SG402L is located at the left of the base 109SG410 in the lateral width direction, and the right part of the base 109SG410 in the lateral width direction. , the third movable body 109SG402R is arranged respectively.

The movable body unit 109SG400 includes a first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L, and a third moving body unit 109SG400. and a third movable body motor 109SG423 for operating the movable body 109SG402R. Therefore, the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R in the characteristic portion 109SG can operate independently of the first movable body 109SG401. Also, a movable body LED 109SG495 is built in a predetermined position of the first movable body 109SG401 (for example, an upper position of the first movable body 109SG401).

Among the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the first movable body 109SG401 is driven by the first movable body motor 109SG421 to move to the retracted position, which is the lower position of the image display device 5. From (see FIG. 40-3 (A)), a suggested position above the retracted position (see FIG. 40-3 (B)), an effect above the suggested position and also at the front position of the image display device 5 It is movable to the position (see FIG. 40-3(C)).

The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are driven by the second movable body motor 109SG422 and the third movable body motor 109SG423 to move to the retracted position (FIG. 40) which is the lower position of the image display device 5. -3 (A)) to the left and right proximity positions (see FIG. 40-3 (C)) of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-3(A) to 40-3(C), the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all at the retracted position. The position state is the first state of the movable body unit 109SG400, and the first movable body 109SG401 is positioned at the suggested position, while the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are positioned at the retracted position. The state is the second state of the movable body unit 109SG400, the first movable body 109SG401 is positioned at the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are positioned at the production position. The state in which the movable body unit 109SG400 is located at the right and left close positions is defined as the third state.

FIG. 40-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characterizing section 109SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 40-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 40-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 40-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is "loss" or "big win" or "minor win". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 40-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10") to be described later, Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a pattern designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a result of determination at the time of winning, the determination result of the big hit type (probability variation or non-probability variation), and whether it will be a small hit. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

It should be noted that the commands shown in FIG. 40-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, and these commands may be used instead of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count that a notification command of passage, probability variation control, and time saving control are performed is performed.

FIG. 40-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 40-5, in this characteristic portion 109SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big hit" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". It is a random value used to determine the , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 40-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In the present characteristic unit 109SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big win" to the big win game state. It is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 109SG), the probability that the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 40-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 109SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 109SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 40-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 109SG selects any of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot gaming state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present characteristic portion 109SG will be described using FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" that are executed and shift to a high-probability high base state, and high-probability low base state in which high-probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time-saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . Then, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds). . In addition, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" and "non-probability variable big win" is repeated twice (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 109SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is set to 0.1 second. It's becoming In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

The high-probability control and the time-saving control executed after the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win is finished are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the jackpot game state is finished. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is a variable probability big win, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the big-win game state ends, so that the big-win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state. , a so-called continuous state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 109SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 40-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable big hit A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which there are few prize balls to be obtained is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 40-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" and "variable probability big hit C" depends on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure. Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 40-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 109SG. In this characteristic portion 109SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in the present characteristic portion 109SG, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be provided.

In addition, the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 109SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 40-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 109SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the present characteristic unit 109SG, as will be described later, the type of the variation pattern is determined first, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 40-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 109SG. In this characteristic part 109SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-9, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is used to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 jackpot) and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (super reach β2 big hit variation pattern).

In addition, when the variable display result is a probability variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is PB1-1 (normal reach big hit variation pattern) and PB1 using the big hit variation pattern determination table A. -2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 jackpot), PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (variation pattern of super reach β2 jackpot) Determine from

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 40-9, in the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B, while the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 is the same, PB1-2, PB1 -3, PB1-4, and PB1-5 are assigned different numbers of determination values. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 2 in PB1-1, 45 in PB1-2, 150 in PB1-3, 300 in PB1-4, and 500 in PB1-5 values are assigned to each. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, there are two determination values for PB1-1, 30 for PB1-2, 135 for PB1-3, 315 for PB1-4, and 515 for PB1-5. assigned to each. That is, in the characteristic portion 109SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable big hit, the variation pattern is the super reach β1, β2 variation pattern PB1-4 at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable big hit. Alternatively, since PB1-5 is determined, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). do. That is, in this characteristic portion 109SG, since the variable display is performed in the same variation pattern when the variable display result is the probability variable big hit C and when the variable display result is the small win, the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable probability big win C or a small win.

Also, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 fluctuation pattern) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α2), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α2), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α2), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach out of time), PA2-1 (variation pattern out of normal reach), PA2-2 (variation pattern out of super reach α1), PA2-3 (variation pattern out of super reach α2) and PA2 -4 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β1) and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β2).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic unit 109SG is "missing", the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the fact that it is in a time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) increase the rate of variable display execution. , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 40-28 to 40-35, the variable display of super reach α1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-2, PB1-2) in this characteristic portion 109SG is a special figure variable display time of 40 It is a variable display for executing a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A as a reach effect of super reach. The variable display of super reach α2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-3 and PB1-3) has a special figure variable display time of 50 seconds, and a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character B as a reach effect of super reach. is a variable display that executes The variable display of super reach β1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A as a reach effect of super reach. is a variable display that executes The variable display of super reach β2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A as a reach effect of super reach. is a variable display that executes

Then, as shown in FIG. 40-9, as the jackpot expectations of each variable display in this characteristic portion 109SG, the jackpot expectations of super reach β2 are set to be the highest, and thereafter, super reach β1 and super reach α2. , Super Reach α1, Normal Reach, and Non-Reach are set in order of high expectations for big hits (Expectations for big hits in each variable display in this characteristic portion 109SG: Super Reach β2>Super Reach β1>Super Reach α2>Super Reach α1 > normal reach > non-reach).

In other words, focusing on the variable display of super reach, this characteristic portion 109SG determines whether the friend character displayed as a battle effect (reach effect of super reach) is friend character A or friend character B. The degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the combination of which of the enemy character A and B the enemy character displayed as the ready-to-win effect is.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 109SG, there is a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 109SG150 shown in FIG. 40-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 109SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 109SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 109SG153, a game control counter setting unit 109SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 109SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 109SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) occurs, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Retained data such as random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 109SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 109SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 109SG151C is associated with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, and the general pattern display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 109SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 109SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 109SG190 as shown in FIG. It is The production control data holding area 109SG190 shown in FIG. 40-11(A) includes the production control flag setting unit 109SG191, the production control timer setting unit 109SG192, the production control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the production control buffer setting unit 109SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 109SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 109SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are these starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

Furthermore, in the start-winning reception command buffer 109SG194A of the characteristic unit 109SG, a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending storage display is set is set to the first special figure pending storage and the second special A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the figure reserved storage.

If execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display pattern of the reserved memory display is stored in the reserved display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, When the execution of the reading notice effect is determined, a special mode different from the normal display mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) is set, the reserved memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U. , and in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

At the time of start winning to the first start winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 109SG194A at the time of starting winning (the entry with the youngest buffer number). go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting mouth winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command is sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

40-11(B), each time the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 40-11 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing section 109SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 35 will be described based on FIG. 40-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 109SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 109SGS101a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 109SG154, should be able to identify the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 109SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 109SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "1" ( step 109 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 109SGS101a (step 109SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 109 SGS 101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 109SGS101b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 109SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit (step 109SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "2" ( step 109 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 109SGS103 and step 109SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer is updated so as to add 1 (step 109SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 109SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 109SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 109 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 109SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, while when the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 109SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 109SGS110, the transmission setting of the start-up prize designation command according to the start-up buffer value is performed (step 109SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 109SGS111, a winning random number value determination processing is executed (step 109SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 109SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 109SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 109SGS114; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 109SGS116), End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 40-13(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 109 SGS112 of FIG. 40-12 as the winning random number determination processing. In this characteristic portion 109SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 35, FIG. result) is regarded as a "jackpot", and it is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot game state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 35, FIG. 40-12), which will be described later, determination of variation patterns that specifically define the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 109 SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 40-13 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of the machine 1 (step 109SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is the time saving state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 109SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 40-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 109SGS109 in FIG. 40-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 109SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 109 SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each determination It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the jackpot determination range in step 109SGS123, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not hit the jackpot (step 109SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 40-6 2 is selected and set (step 109 SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 109SGS109 in FIG. 40-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 109SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 109 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command according to the event (step 109SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 109SGS127), and proceed to step 109SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 109 SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 109SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 109SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 109SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 109 SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the characteristic unit 109SG includes a deviation variation pattern determination table B that is used when the number of pending memories is 3. , and the deviation variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. , In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. In the variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and the variation pattern determination table for loss In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to non-reach variation patterns within the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach out of the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. .

Therefore, in step 109SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

Further, when it is determined in step 109SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 109SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 40-13(A) , based on the random number value MR2 for judging the type of the big hit, the type of the big hit is determined (step 109 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, the symbol designation command according to the determined big hit type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit A, the third symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit B, and the probability variation big hit C in the case of the probability variation big hit C Executes transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, executes the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 109 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (Step 109 SGS 134a). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 109SGS134a; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 109SGS135), and step Go to 109SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot (step 109SGS134a; N), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B (step 109SGS136), and proceed to step 109SGS138.

After executing any of the processing of step 109SGS127, step 109SGS130, step 109SGS131, step 109SGS135, and step 109SGS136, a numerical value indicating each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination data, a variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the random number MR3 (step 109SGS138). In this characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIG. 40-13(B), at least when the variable display result is "loss", regardless of the total number of pending memories, the "non-reach" variable display mode is common. A variable category that becomes a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that becomes a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a variation category based on the random number MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 109SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 109SGS132), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 40-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 36 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 40-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 109 SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 109 SGS221; N), the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command at step 109SGS221 (step 109SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 109 SGS222).

If the received command is not the first start winning designation command at step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting winning designation command (step 109SGS224).

At step 109SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 109SGS226). If the received command is not a design designation command at step 109SGS226 (step 109SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 109SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS228).

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command at step 109SGS228 (step 109SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 109SGS230).

If the received command in step 109SGS222 is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command is the second starting opening winning designation command in step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; Y), in step 109SGS226 If the received command is a pattern designation command (step 109SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; Y), then in step 109SGS228 the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (109SGS228; Y), if the received command is the second pending storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; Y), the received command is stored in the empty space in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. Store it at the beginning of the area (step 109SGS233), and return to the processing of step 109SGS221.

Incidentally, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 109SG194A at the time of starting winning.

In step 109SGS230, if the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 109SGS234), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In particular, in the processing of this characteristic part 162SGS234, when the received command is the first ball output state specifying command, it is determined that the ball output state is the low ball output state, and the value of the performance ball output state flag is set to "0". is set (updated) to , and if the received command is the second ball output state specifying command, the ball output state is determined to be the first high ball output state, and the value of the performance ball output state flag is set to "1". is set (updated) to , and if the received command is the third ball output state specifying command, it is determined that the ball output state is the second high ball output state, and the value of the performance ball output state flag is set to "2". set (updated) to

In addition, in the command analysis processing of this characteristic part 109SG, if the received command is any of the starting entrance winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the pending memory number notification command, the received command is Although the form of sequentially storing from the beginning of the empty area of the received command buffer 109SG194A is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the received command is the first start winning prize designation command, the pending storage number notification command If a pending memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry pending memory that has not received the pending memory number notification command It may be set outside the target of the reading notice effect.

FIG. 40-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 35 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 40-15, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS241), and there is no pending memory (entry) in which the pending display flag is not set. It is determined whether or not there is (step 109SGS242a). If there is no pending memory where the pending display flag is not set (step 109SGS242a; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is pending storage where the pending display flag is not set (step 109SGS242a; Y), Furthermore, it is determined whether or not a super reach performance is being executed (step 109 SGS242b).

Whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super reach is being executed depends on whether the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (whether or not the variable display is being executed) and the value of the effect control process flag. is 2, it is sufficient to refer to the contents of the process data of the variable display being executed and determine whether or not the ready-to-reach effect of super-reach is being executed.

If the reach effect of super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, and if the reach effect of super reach is not being executed (step 109SGS242bb; N), the entry (the pending display flag is It is determined whether or not the symbol designation command stored in the entry not set is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109 SGS243a). When the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, and the symbol designation command stored in the entry indicates a win or a big hit. If it is a design designation command (step 109SGS243a; N), it is determined whether or not the design designation command stored in the entry is the first design designation command (design designation command indicating failure) (step 109SGS243b). .

If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a big hit (step 109 SGS243b; N), The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 109 SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the prediction effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 and the jackpot type specified in step 109SGS244, prefetching at the time of jackpot (not shown) By referring to the notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the read advance notice effect and the display pattern in the case of executing the read advance notice effect (step 109 SGS245).

In step 109 SGS245, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 40-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 40-16, depending on the jackpot type specified in the processing of step 109 SGS244, the presence or absence of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (prediction type) are varied.

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as display patterns (forecast type) of the pre-reading preview effect. Among these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display. It is displayed in area 109SG005U.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-16, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot", the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is also set high. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the rate at which the display pattern α is determined.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the probability variable big hit, and the player's expectation for the probability variable big win can be enhanced.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is always determined to display the pending memory display in a white square (◇) or in a display pattern α or a white star. Although one of the display patterns β displayed in the shape (☆) is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, the variable Similar to the case where the display result is "missing", a case may be provided in which it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect.

Also, in step 109SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command that indicates a loss (step 109SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The variation category indicated by the variation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is specified (step 109 SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command of the entry is C600H, it specifies that it is a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is specified and C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of “other” variation pattern including normal reach.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the category of the variation pattern specified in step 109SGS247 (not shown) Whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the display pattern (notice type) in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect are determined by referring to the pre-reading notice effect judgment table (step 109 SGS248).

In step 109 SGS248, for example, the presence or absence of the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (the notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 40-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 40-16, depending on the category of the variation pattern specified in the processing of step 109 SGS247, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (preview type) are changed. there is

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (notice type). Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is a white square (◇), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area. 109SG005U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005D. It is displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U. Incidentally, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be non-execution, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U in a round shape (○) which is the normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 40-16, when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "not The rate at which the pre-reading forewarning effect is executed (the rate determined for other than "no forewarning effect") is set higher than in the case of "ready to reach". In addition, when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", it is more likely than the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "others". The rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed (the rate at which other than "no notice effect" is determined) is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", if the fluctuation category is "other", than if the fluctuation pattern category is "non-reach" Also, the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the percentage of display pattern α determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "others". Furthermore, when the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach" when the category of the variation pattern is "others". The percentage of display pattern β determined is set higher than in the case, and when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other" The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach" is set to be the highest, and the rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to be the lowest.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no notice effect), the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executed, and the display pattern α Alternatively, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined in any variation pattern category when the variable display result is "mismatch".

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "loss (non-reach)", "loss (super reach)", or "loss (other)", the display pattern α is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot (probability variable jackpot)", when execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than

With such settings, when the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable big hit". Since the ratio of the number of times when the number of times is increased increases, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.

After executing step 109SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 109SGS247, that is, the display pattern (preview type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. (Step 109SGS249).

After execution of step 109 SGS245 or when execution of pre-reading advance notice effect is determined (step 109 SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 109 SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the pending memory display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Further, in step 109SGS249, if the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect is not determined (step 109SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "o" (step 109SGS250), go to step 109SGS252.

Also, as described above, during execution of the reach effect of super reach (step 109SGS242b; Y), or when the symbol designation command of the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a), the entry of the entry After setting the pending display flag to "0" indicating a white "o" (step 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the pending display based on the stored contents of the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the receive command buffer 109SG194A at the time of start winning is displayed in a display mode corresponding to one of "0", "1" and "2" set in the pending display flag. be. In addition, even when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A are shifted, according to the storage contents of the starting winning command buffer 109SG194A after the shift, the display shown in FIG. As shown, the reserved display of the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-17, if the number of first special figure pending storage is one, one pending storage display is displayed. As for the display form of this reserved memory display, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display form of "○" as shown in FIG. 40-17. , When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", the display mode of "☆" is displayed. In addition, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is two, two pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode corresponding to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D. Also, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is three, three pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D. Also, if the number of first special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D.

In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. displayed in the form. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is two, for example, as shown in FIG. As a mode according to the flag value set in the flag, for example, the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U is displayed in the display mode where the reserved memory display of 1 is "○" and the reserved memory display of 1 is displayed in the display mode of "☆". Is displayed. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is three, three pending storage display is displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory is reduced (consumed), and as shown in FIG. center).

In other words, if the pending memory of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A is shifted by consuming the pending memory in the variable display start setting process to be described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, the variable display starting time after the shift is shifted. Based on the pending memory of the received command buffer 109SG194A, the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new pending memory due to the start winning. , the display pattern of the reserved memory is determined and set to the reserved display flag, and the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005D are displayed in a display mode according to the flag value set to the reserved display flag. It will be displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U.

In addition, in this characterizing section 109SG, the processing of step 109SGS252 is exemplified in the pre-reading notice setting processing, but the present invention is not limited to this. And the process for updating the pending display of the second pending storage display area 109SG005U may be executed separately as a process (for example, pending display update process) different from the pre-reading notice setting process.

Further, in step 109SG242, the characterizing section 109SG determines execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the starting winning on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning. New storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 109SGS242 due to the simultaneous occurrence of the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening If it is determined that there is, that is, if the entry whose display undecided flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage, both entries are pre-read notice It is a target for determining whether to execute the performance or not. Both the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the first special plan is newly stored and the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special plan are newly stored are stored depending on whether the pre-reading notice effect is executed or not. In the case of a determination target, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the pending display of the pending storage of the first special symbol and the pending display of the second special symbol There is a case where the pre-reading forewarning effects are simultaneously executed in both displays.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 109SG, as described above, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is Both the newly stored pending memory and the newly stored pending memory command at the time of starting winning in the second special figure are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect, but the present invention is this In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan Only one of them may be determined to execute.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special symbol is suspended in the second special symbol. Priority is given to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading foretelling effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan is unambiguously determined to be non-execution, and the first special plan When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution and non-execution of pre-reading notice effect in pending storage in the second special figure is determined with priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice performance in the reserved storage in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan, it is unambiguously decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, and the second special plan When it is determined not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 40-18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 109 SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 109SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 109 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off at step 109SGS271 (step 109SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A, one buffer number It is shifted upward by minutes (step 109 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 109SGS272 or step 109SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 109SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 109SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, select a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

And, in step 109SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 109 SGS282).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 109SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 109SGS284). Also, the first time is set in the variable display control timer (step 109SGS285). The first time is, for example, 33 ms, and every time the first time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 stores image data during variable display, including image data indicating the display state of left, middle, and right decorative patterns, in the VRAM. The write/display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized (see FIG. 40-20).

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (step 109 SGS287). If the variable display variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287; Y), the movable body control timer is set to the second time (step 109SGS288). The second time is, for example, 1 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 operates the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 each time the first time elapses. control. Thereby, movement control of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is realized (see FIG. 40-20).

After step 109SGS288 is executed, or if the variation pattern of the variable display is not the super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287; N), the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 109 SGS286).

FIG. 40-19 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer (step 109SGS301, step 109SGS302, step 109SGS303). If the variable display is super reach variable display (step 109SGS303b; Y), the value of the movable body control timer is decremented by 1 (step 109SGS303c).

After step 109SGS303c is executed, or if it is not super reach variable display (step 109SGS303b; N), the process proceeds to step 109SGS306.

At step 109 SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 109 SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 109 SGS308). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 109SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (for performance component) is executed (step 109SGS309b).

After executing the process of step 109SGS309a or step 109SGS309b, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f).

If the variable display is super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; Y), it is further determined whether or not the movable body control timer has timed out (109SGS309g). If the movable body control timer has timed out (step 109SGS309g; Y), the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 are driven according to the contents of the process data. (Step 109SGS309h). Then, the movable body control timer is reset (the second time is set in the movable body control timer again), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 (step 109SGS309i).

If the variable display is not super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; N) and if the movable body control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS309g; N), the processing of steps 109SGS309h and 109SGS309i is executed. without proceeding to step 109 SGS310.

Next, it is checked whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen (33 ms The image data of the screen to be displayed after the elapse of time is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 109 SGS311). In this manner, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of decorative patterns and display control of other images (display control of moving images). The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variation of the decorative design. Also, the variable display control timer is reset to the first time (step 109 SGS312).

Further, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS310; N), after executing step 109SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable display time timer has timed out (step 109SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 109 SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination designation command is received is in the ON state (step 109 SGS314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the fluctuation. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n expires in the process of step 109 SGS306, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and variable display control of decorative patterns based on the process table is performed. ends.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device during the reach effect of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 in the characteristic portion 109SG will be described. Rendering modes of variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-21 to 40-24.

First, as shown in FIGS. 40-21 and 40-22, with respect to the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach α2, when the reach effects of super reach α1 and super reach α2 are started, the first enlarged display period. , Character images displayed on the image display device 5 during the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period If there is, ally character A and enemy character B) are enlarged and displayed.

Specifically, in the first enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged at a constant speed from the normal display magnification (1 time) to the display magnification m1, and in the second enlarged display period, the character image is displayed from the display magnification m1. The character image is enlarged at a constant speed up to the magnification m2, and in the third enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged from the display magnification m2 to the display magnification m3 at a constant speed. After the end of the third enlarged display period, the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 for a predetermined period, and the display magnification of the character image is returned to the normal display magnification at the timing when the predetermined period has passed. .

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period are all of the same length. Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-21 and 40-22, among the differences between the display magnifications, the difference between the normal display magnification and the display magnification m1 is the largest, and the difference between the display magnification m2 and the display magnification m3 is the largest. is the smallest. That is, in this characteristic portion 109SG, the character image enlargement speed is set to be the fastest during the first enlargement display period and the slowest during the third enlargement display period (character image enlargement speed: first enlarged display period>second enlarged display period>third enlarged display period). In addition, in the characterizing portion 109SG, “fast enlargement speed” means that the image enlargement rate per unit time is high.

Thereafter, in this characteristic portion 109SG, a period T2 is a period (a period during which the movable body action suggestive effect is executed) combining the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period described above, and the third enlarged display period and the character image are displayed. A period including the predetermined period during which the display magnification is maintained at m3 may be referred to as a period T3.

As shown in FIG. 40-21, during the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α1 and super reach α2, if the variable display result is a big hit, the time period from the end of period T3 to the end of variable display As an effect to notify that the variable display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving to the close position (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved. A movable body motion effect A is executed to move the movable body unit 109SG400 to the retracted position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40-22, during the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α1 and super reach α2, if the variable display result is wrong, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure.

Henceforth, in this characterizing part 109SG, the period during which the movable body effect A and the deviation notification effect are executed may be referred to as a period T4. Among these periods T2 to T4, the period T3 is the shortest period and the period T4 is the longest period (the length of the periods T2 to T4: period T4>period T2>period T3).

In addition, during the ready-to-reach performances of super reach α1 and super reach α2, effect images are also displayed on the image display device 5 as movable body motion suggestion performance A and movable body motion performance A (only when the variable display result is a big hit). .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 40-21 and 40-22, in the image display device 5, the first movable body A movable body motion suggesting production A is executed in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward 109SG401 at a speed V1.

Furthermore, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2 over a period T4 as part of the above-described movable body motion presentation A. It moves (diffuses) toward the edge of the display device 5 . Note that the absolute value of the speed V2 is greater than the absolute value of the speed V1. In other words, the movable body action effect A in the characterizing part 109SG is also an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S moves faster than the movable body action suggestive effect A.

Further, during the reach performance of super reach α1 and super reach α2, light emission of the movable body LED 109SG495 is also executed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 40-21 and 40-22, the movable body LED 109SG495 is in the middle of the above-described period T2 (the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period) and period T3 (more precisely is the start timing of the first enlarged display period to the end timing of the third enlarged display period), the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1. Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light with a luminance C2 higher than the luminance C1 over a period T4.

In addition, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, four types of performance sounds can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R: BGM such as music, SE (sound effect), action suggestive sound, and big hit notification sound. , and the type of sound output differs depending on the time during the reach production.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 40-21 and 40-22, the BGM is the dramatic sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R only during the period T3. output is stopped. That is, the output of BGM in the ready-to-win effect is executed over the period T4 from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect to the end timing of the period T2.

Also, SE (sound effect) is a dramatic sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, like BGM, but unlike BGM, there is no period during which output from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. . In other words, the SE output in the ready-to-win effect is performed throughout the ready-to-win effect.

The motion suggestive sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body motion suggestive production A. That is, the action suggesting sound is output only during the period T2 during which the movable body action suggesting effect A is executed, and is not output during the other periods. The big hit notification sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body motion presentation A. In other words, the big hit notification sound is output only during the period T4 during which the movable body action effect A is executed when the variable display result is a big win, and is not output during the other periods.

As shown in FIGS. 40-23 and 40-24, for the variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2, when the reach effects of super reach β1 and super reach β2 are started, the first enlarged display period and the second Character images displayed on the image display device 5 during the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (in the case of the reach effect of super reach β1, friendly character B and enemy character A; Enlarged display of ally character B and enemy character B) is performed.

Fig. 40- 21 and FIG. 40-22, the description of which is the same as the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach α2 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 40-23, during the ready-to-win performance of super reach β1 and super reach β2, if the variable display result is a big hit, the variable As an effect informing that the display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the close position of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to their retracted positions. A movable body action effect B to move (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state) is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40-24, during the ready-to-reach effect of super reach β1 and super reach β2, if the variable display result is wrong, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure. The movable object effect B is an effect that is executed over the period T4, like the movable object effect A and the failure notification effect described above.

Also, during the reach effects of super reach β1 and super reach β2, as shown in FIGS. A movable body motion suggesting effect B is executed in which the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly moved (reciprocated) between the retracted position and the suggested position. Note that the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position in the movable body motion suggesting effect B is shorter than the aforementioned period T3 ( Length of period T1 to period T4: period T4>period T2>period T3>period T1).

As described above, in variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, as shown in FIG. While the action suggesting effect is executed, the movable body action suggesting effect is not executed during the third enlarged display period. Among the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is the fastest in the first enlarged display period (the image enlargement ratio per unit time is large), and the character image enlargement rate is the highest in the first enlarged display period. During the enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is set to be the slowest (image enlargement rate per unit time is small).

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-26(A), when the movable body motion suggesting effect A and the movable body motion suggesting effect B are compared, the movable body motion suggesting effect A is a star-shaped effect image on the image display device 5. 109SG005S repeatedly acts on the first movable body 109SG401 (a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1), and the first movable body 109SG401 itself. does not move, whereas the movable body motion suggesting effect B is different in that the first movable body 109SG401 repeatedly moves between the retracted position and the suggesting position. On the other hand, both the movable body motion suggesting effect A and the movable body motion suggesting effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1 during the execution period of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 40-26(B), comparing the movable body action effect A and the movable body action effect B, the movable body action effect A moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retracted position to the effect position. , move the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R to the close position of the first movable body moved to the effect position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and This is an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S spreads from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed of V2. In the movable body motion effect B, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the effected position to the approach position of the first movable body. It is an effect of moving (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S diffusing from the first movable body 109SG401 at the speed V2 is not executed. This is different from the movable body motion presentation A. Further, both the movable body motion effect A and the movable body motion effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1 during the execution period of the effect.

Next, the display mode of the ready-to-win effect on the image display device 5 in the variable display of super-to-win α1, super-to-win α2, super-to-win β1, and super-reach to β2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-27 to 40-35.

First, as shown in FIGS. 40-27 (A) and 40-27 (B), after a while from the start of variable display of any one of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, , the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L and the "right" decorative design display area 5R are stopped in a combination indicating reach. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the state of reach, if the variable display is the variable display of super reach α1, a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A is started as a reach effect (FIG. 40-27 (C ) and FIG. 40-28(A)), if the variable display is the super reach α2 variable display, a battle effect between friendly character A and enemy character B is started as a reach effect (FIGS. 40-27(D) and FIG. 40-30 (A)), if the variable display is super reach β1 variable display, a battle effect between friend character B and enemy character A is started as a reach effect (FIGS. 40-27 (E) and 40 -32 (A)), if the variable display is a super reach β2 variable display, a battle effect between friendly character B and enemy character B is started as a reach effect (FIGS. 40-27 (F) and FIG. 40- 34(A)).

At the start of the ready-to-win performance of these super ready-to-win, the decorative symbols displayed in the “left” decorative design display area 5L and the “right” decorative design display area 5R are displayed at the upper left and right ends of the display area of the image display device 5. The decorative patterns displayed in the display area 5Cni of the "middle" decorative patterns become temporarily invisible.

As shown in FIGS. 40-28 (A) and 40-28 (B), in the latter half of the battle production, which is the reach production of super reach α1, as shown in FIG. Display of a moving image in which character A attacks enemy character A is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 40-28(C) to 40-28(F), the friendly character A is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character A is about to be attacked by melee, the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 40-28(D) to 40-28(F)), the images of friend character A and enemy character A are displayed first on image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figs. 40-28(A) to 40-28(C)), and overlaps the images of friendly character A and enemy character A with these low contrasts. , an image in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move at a speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body action suggestive effect A) is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, so that the player can see the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V1 and the first movable body 109SG401. It is easy to recognize the movement toward.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-28(E) to 40-28(F), when the third enlarged display period has passed, the friendly character A and the enemy character A are displayed at a display magnification of m3 for a predetermined period of time. to display. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 40-29(H) and 40-29(I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the player character A and the enemy character are displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body action effect A. An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character A, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. An effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. be.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character A's attack hits enemy character A on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 40-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As shown in FIGS. 40-30 (A) and 40-30 (B), when the second half of the battle production (reach production) as the ready-to-reach production of super reach α2 is reached, it is shown in FIG. 40-30 (C). Thus, display of a moving image in which friendly character A attacks enemy character B is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 40-30(C) to 40-30(F), the friendly character A is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character B is about to be attacked by melee, the images of the friend character A and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 40-30(D) to 40-30(F)), the images of friend character A and enemy character B are displayed first on image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figs. 40-30(A) to 40-30(C)), and overlaps the images of friendly character A and enemy character B which have become low contrast. , an image in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move at a speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body action suggestive effect A) is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, so that the player can see the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V1 and the first movable body 109SG401. It is easy to recognize the movement toward.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40-30(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friend character A and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 40-31(G) to 40-31(I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the player character A and the enemy character are displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect A. An effect image 109SG005B of an explosion is displayed overlapping the image of the character B, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. An effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. be.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character A's attack hits enemy character B on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 40-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As shown in FIGS. 40-32 (A) and 40-32 (B), when the second half of the battle production (reach production) is reached as the reach production of super reach β1, as shown in FIG. 40-32 (C) At this time, display of a moving image of friendly character B attacking enemy character A starts. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 40-32(C) to 40-32(F), the friendly character B is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character A is about to be attacked by a close-range attack, the images of the friend character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggesting effect B (movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state of 109SG400 and the change from the second state to the first state are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-32(D) and 40-32(E), during the enlarged display period of the images of friend character B and enemy character A, effect image 109SG005X is displayed on image display device 5, Enlarged display of the images of friend character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40-32(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friend character B and the enemy character A are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 40-33(G) to 40-33(I), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the player character B and the enemy character are displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect B. An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the character A image.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character B's attack hits enemy character A on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 40-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As shown in FIGS. 40-34 (A) and 40-34 (B), when the second half of the battle production (reach production) as the reach production of super reach β2 is reached, as shown in FIG. 40-34 (C) At that time, display of a moving image in which ally character B attacks enemy character B starts. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 40-34(C) to 40-34(F), the friendly character B is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character B is about to be attacked by melee, the images of the friend character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggesting effect B (movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state of 109SG400 and the change from the second state to the first state are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-34(D) and 40-34(E), during the enlarged display period of the images of friend character B and enemy character A, effect image 109SG005X is displayed on image display device 5, Enlarged display of the images of friend character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40-34(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friend character B and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-35(G) to 40-35(I), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the player character B is displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect B. and an explosion effect image 109SG005B overlapping the image of the enemy character B, and a plurality of stars moving from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. A model effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character B's attack hits enemy character B on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost).
At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 40-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 109SG displays the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion production B, as shown in FIGS. 40-31 to 40-35. On the other hand, during execution of the movable body motion effect B, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, so that the display of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion allows the image of the friend character and the enemy character during the ready-to-reach effect to be displayed. Since the enlarged display and the rendering motion of the movable body motion rendering B by the movable bodies (the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R) can be made more conspicuous, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 40-21 to 40-24, the enlargement speed of each character's image differs between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period. Since the motion speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the control load of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion presentation can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-21 to 40-24, the enlargement speed is slower in the second enlargement display period than in the first enlargement display period, and the third enlargement display period is Since the enlargement speed is slower than that of the second enlargement display period, the enlargement display of the images of the ally character and the enemy character is continued even after the movable body motion suggesting effect is finished, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in this characteristic portion 109SG, an example is given in which the enlargement speed is the fastest during the first enlargement display period and the enlargement speed is the slowest during the third enlargement display period, but the present invention is not limited to this. The enlargement speed may be the fastest in the third enlargement display period, the enlargement speed in the first enlargement display period may be the slowest, or the enlargement speed in the second enlargement display period may be the fastest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-21 to 40-24, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted during the ready-to-win effect including the enlarged display period. It is possible to prevent the attention of the In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted throughout the execution period of the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading notice The period during which the execution of the effect is restricted may be only part of the ready-to-win effect (for example, only the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period). In addition, in the feature part 109SG, as a form of limiting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, a form of not executing the pre-reading notice effect during the ready-to-win effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , during the ready-to-win effect, the pre-reading forewarning effect may be executed at a lower rate than other periods.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 40-32 and 40-34, the player can visually recognize the ready-to-win effect during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect B, but as shown in FIGS. 40-33 and 40-35 Furthermore, during execution of the movable body action effect B, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, thereby reducing the visibility of the ready-to-win effect. In other words, since the visibility of the effect image of the reach effect (images of the ally character and the enemy character) changes according to the action status of the first movable body 109SG401, the action of the first movable body 109SG401 can be used as the effect suggesting the action of the movable body. It is possible to make it easy to understand whether it is a motion or a motion as a movable body motion rendering, and it is possible to adjust the attention degree of the first movable body 109SG401 and the ready-to-win rendering rendering image.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 40-21 and 40-23, during execution of the movable body motion suggestive presentation, BGM, SE, and action suggestive sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the movable body motion presentation is executed. During the middle, BGM, SE, and a jackpot notification sound are output from the speakers 8L, 8R, so before and after the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable object action effect, the output from the speakers 8L, 8R is performed. The player can easily recognize that the effect sound is changing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-21 to 40-24, the period T3 is longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position. Since the period T3 is a period shorter than the period T2 during which the movable body action suggestion effect is executed, the action of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body action suggestion effect is the same as the action of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body action suggestion effect. It is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood as , and increase the interest in the game by making the movable body motion suggestion performance execution period longer than the movable body motion performance execution period in the suggested ready-to-win performance. decline can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-21 to 40-24, by turning off the movable body LED 109SG495 during the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start of the movable body motion effect or the deviation notification effect, the movable body LED 109SG495 is off, the player can easily recognize that the first movable body 109SG401 is not operating.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-32 and 40-34, in the movable body motion suggesting effect B, only the first movable body 109SG401 is operated, and as shown in FIGS. In the action effect B, since all of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are operated, it is possible to determine whether the action of the movable body is a motion suggesting the action of the movable body or the effect of the action of the movable body. This makes it easy for the player to distinguish whether the action is a movement or not.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-21 to 40-24, during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1, and the movable body motion presentation is performed. Since the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light with the luminance C2, which is higher than the luminance C1, the player can easily recognize that the movable body action presentation is being executed by the luminance of the movable body LED 109SG495. , the amusement of the game can also be improved during execution of the movable body motion presentation.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-28 and 40-30, during the execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect A, the image display device 5 displays a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, and other ready-to-reach effects are displayed. Effect images (images of ally character A and enemy character A or enemy character B) are displayed with a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period, that is, during execution of movable body action suggestive effect A, effect image of reach effect. , the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S can be made conspicuous, and the movement of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S at the speed V1 can draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the motion of the first movable body 109SG401.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 40-29 and 40-31, when the movable body action effect A is executed, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S appear on the image display device 5 at a speed V2, which is higher than the speed V1. is displayed so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S can be made conspicuous in the movable body motion presentation A, and these Since the movement of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V2 can draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the motion of the first movable body 109SG401, thereby increasing the interest in the game. can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-28(F) and 40-30(F), the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5 before the movable body action effect A or the deviation notification effect is executed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the effect to be executed from now on is the movable body motion effect or the failure notification effect.

Although the characteristic portion 109SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

For example, in the characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-21 to 40-24, the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlargement display period (first enlargement display period) are the same. , the start timing of the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 and the start timing of enlarged display of the effect image (image of the friend character and the enemy character) of the ready-to-win effect are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) may be different. In particular, when the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect is set to be earlier than the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period), the reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggesting effect is performed. player's attention.

Further, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 after the end of the enlarged display period is substantially the same as the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period (the display magnification is slightly different). only), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as modification 109SG-2, after the enlarged display period ends, a specific effect is displayed on the image display device 5 , an effect image, or the like may be displayed so that the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period is different. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the enlarged display period has ended after the enlarged display period has ended.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the image display device 5 can display an explosion effect image 109SG005B corresponding to the actions of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R during the ready-to-win effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-3, the image display device 5 displays the The effect image may be displayed.

In this way, if the image display device 5 can display both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion corresponding to the motion of the movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production, The size of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion may differ from that of the effect image according to the progress of the battle production. By doing so, the image display device 5 can display an effect image of an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the motion of the movable body and the battle performance during the ready-to-win performance, so that the game interest can be improved. .

Furthermore, if the image display device 5 can display both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion corresponding to the movement of the movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production, the effect of the explosion corresponding to the movement of these movable bodies can be displayed. The image transparency of the image 109SG005B and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production may be varied. In this way, the image display device 5 can display an effect image with an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the action of the movable body and the battle performance during the ready-to-win performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, during the period from the end of the movable body action suggestive effect and the enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body action effect or the failure notification effect, the friendly character and the enemy character are visually recognized on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-4, after the movable body motion suggesting effect and the enlarged display period are over, the movable body motion effect or the deviation notification is given. During the period until the start timing of the effect, the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 are set to the first low visibility state, which is lower than before the end of the enlarged display period, thereby reducing the visibility of the friend character and the enemy character. You may let Furthermore, when executing the movable body action effect (when the variable display result is a big hit), by setting the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 from the first low visibility state to a second low visibility state, The visibility of the friend character and the enemy character may be further reduced. By doing so, after the enlarged display period ends, the player can easily recognize that the enlarged display period has ended due to the decrease in the visibility of the friend character and the enemy character on the image display device 5. , When the movable body effect is executed, attention can be paid to the actions of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R.

Further, in the characterizing section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-28 to 40-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body motion effect. (the same ally character and enemy character) are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The image display device 5 may display different effect images. In particular, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestive effect is more than the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion effect. can be increased. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of variations of the effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect, so that the amusement of the game during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect can be improved. .

Further, in the characterizing section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-28 to 40-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body motion effect. (same ally character and enemy character) are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, the movable body motion suggestion corresponding image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion effect is being executed. As the body action effect corresponding image, an image different from the movable body action suggestive effect corresponding image may be displayed.

Further, when the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect, the display period of the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the display period of the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect are set to can be different. By doing so, the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect effect are combined with the motions of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R (execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect). or execution of movable body action presentation).

Furthermore, when displaying the image corresponding to the movable body action effect on the image display device 5, the visibility of the image corresponding to the movable body action effect may be reduced by reducing the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5. By doing so, when the movable body action effect is executed, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the movable body action effect instead of the image corresponding to the movable body action effect.

Further, when the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestive effect, the image display device 5 outputs the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestive effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestive effect from the speaker 8L8R. When the image corresponding to the movable body action effect is displayed in , the sound corresponding to the movable body action effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body action effect may be output from the speaker 8L8R. By doing so, it is possible to output sounds corresponding to each image displayed on the image display device 5 from the speakers 8L and 8R when the movable body action suggestive presentation and the movable body action presentation are executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the movable body motion suggesting presentation or the movable body motion presentation is being performed.

Furthermore, when the movable body motion effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect (when the variable display result is a big hit), the image display device 5 can be operated on the image display device 5 from a timing before the start of the movable body motion effect. Display of the image corresponding to the body action effect may be started. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the start of the movable body action presentation during the ready-to-win presentation of super ready-to-win, and to increase the player's attention to the movable body action presentation.

Further, in the characterizing portion 109SG, in the reach effects of super reach α1 and super reach α2, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 toward the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although the form in which the display that moves at the speed V1 is executed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-7, the speed V1 is not a constant speed but within a predetermined range It may be variable. In this case, for example, when the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401, the speed of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is changed to the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggesting effect A. is changed to a lower speed (the speed V1 is changed to a lower speed) as it approaches . Note that the speed V2 of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S during execution of the movable body motion presentation A may be set to a speed higher than the maximum speed of the speed V1. By doing so, when the movable body motion suggesting effect A is executed, the movement speed (speed V1) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes, thereby improving the game interest. can.

In addition, the characterizing section 109SG outputs one action suggesting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to execution of the movable body motion suggesting presentation, and one loudspeaker notification from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the execution of the movable body motion presentation. Although the mode of outputting sound has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of sounds may be output as the action-indicating sound and the jackpot notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. .

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to output a plurality of sounds as the action suggestive sound and the big hit notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a plurality of output start timings of the action suggestive sound and the big hit notification sound are provided, and the operation is performed at any timing. Different sounds may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R depending on whether the suggestive sound or the jackpot notification sound is started to be output. By doing so, the player can easily recognize that the movable body action suggestive effect or the movable body action effect is being executed by the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the sound can be output according to the output timing. Since the action-indicating sound and the big-hit notification sound are changed by pressing, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In particular, when the output timing of the action-indicative sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios depending on the result of the variable display. In this case, since the player can be made to pay attention to the timing at which the output of the action-indicating sound is started, the amusement of the game can be improved. Further, when the output timing of the jackpot notification sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be decided at different ratios according to the jackpot type and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 . In this case, since the player can be made to pay attention to the timing at which the output of the big-win notification sound is started, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-21 to 40-24, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved at a constant speed between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body action suggestive effect. Although the form of reciprocating movement has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the first movable body 109SG401 may be temporarily stopped at the retracted position and the suggested position, or the first movable body 109SG401 may be decelerated or accelerated at positions near the retracted position and the suggested position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401 from being out of step.

In addition, in the characterizing part 109SG, after the movable body motion suggesting effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 is kept waiting at the retracted position until the movable body motion effect or the failure notification effect is started. The present invention is not limited to this, and after the movable body motion suggesting effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to wait at the suggesting position until the movable body motion effect or the deviation notification effect is started. good too. By doing so, when the movable body motion presentation is executed, the first movable body 109SG401 can be immediately moved to the presentation position, so that the game interest can be improved. Furthermore, since the first movable body 109SG401 is maintained at the suggesting position after the movable body action suggestive effect is completed, the player's expectation for execution of the movable body action effect can be aroused.

40-21 to 40-24, the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is increased during execution of the movable body motion suggesting presentation and during execution of the movable body motion presentation. Although they are the same, the present invention is not limited to this. good too.

40-20, the characteristic unit 109SG controls the update of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable bodies (the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, the third movable body 109SG402R) are executed based on the respective control timers, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable body In addition to the movement control of , lighting control of LEDs provided in the pachinko game machine 1, output control of effect sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like may be executed based on respective dedicated control timers.

In this way, when executing the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, the movement control of the movable body, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound, for example, the effect control The CPU 120 executes a timer interrupt (performs S73 to S77 of the effect control main processing shown in FIG. 38 every 1 ms), and the effect image update control is performed every 33 ms, the movable body movement control is performed every 1 ms, and the LED lighting control is executed every 10 ms, and effect sound output control is executed every 1 ms. In particular, when the performance image update control, LED lighting control, and performance sound output control are executed, movement control of the movable body (first movable body motor 109SG421, second movable body motor 109SG422, third movable body motor 109SG422, drive control of the motor 109SG423) are executed together, movement control of the movable body, effect image update control, LED lighting control, and effect sound output control can be preferably executed.

In addition, in the characterizing part 109SG, the form in which the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light during the execution of the movable body motion suggestive effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LED 109SG495 may have a plurality of light emission modes. It is also possible to vary the ratio of control to the big win game state according to the manner in which the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect.

In addition, in the characterizing section 109SG, a form in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggesting effect A was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S to be displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggesting effect A are provided, and the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed in one of the modes as the movable body motion suggesting effect A. Depending on the number, the ratio controlled to the big hit game state may be varied.

Further, in the characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIG. 40-25, during the third enlarged display period, the first movable body 109SG401 can be reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position (movable body motion suggestion presentation). Although a mode in which the execution is not performed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is performed even during the third enlarged display period. A case may be provided. In particular, when the variable display result is a big hit, the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 can be executed during the third enlarged display period, thereby enabling the third enlarged display. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the first movable body 109SG401 reciprocates between the retracted position and the suggested position during the display period, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 109SG, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are moved toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestive effect A), or the first movable body 109SG401 is moved between the retracted position and the suggested position. (Movable body motion suggestive effect B) to suggest the execution of movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Execution of the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion effect B may be suggested in a mode other than the display of the image of the first movable body 109SG401 itself. For example, when the first movable body 109SG401 is provided with an LED (movable body LED 109SG495) as shown in the characteristic portion 109SG, the lighting and blinking period of the LED, the lighting color, etc., can be used to produce a movable body motion effect A or a movable body motion. Execution of production B may be suggested.

40-28 and 40-30, in the characterizing section 109SG, the contrast between the images of the friend character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body action suggestion effect A. 40-28 (D) and 40-30 (D)), but the present invention is limited to this 40-28(C), before the image display device 5 reduces the contrast between the images of the friend character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B. 40-30(C)), the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S may be started.

When the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is started before the contrast between the images of friend character A and enemy character A or enemy character B is lowered in the image display device 5 as described above, By increasing the degree of transparency (transparency) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, the effect image being displayed on the image display device 5 (in the examples of FIGS. Alternatively, the image of the enemy character B) may be made more visible than when the contrast is lowered.

40-29(G) and the like, in the characteristic portion 109SG, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body action presentation, and is displayed on the image display device 5. Although a part of the effect image that is displayed is invisible due to the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image is displayed when the movable body action effect is executed. The effect image 109SG005B of the explosion or an image dedicated to the motion effect of the movable body may be displayed in the entire display area of the device 5, and all the other effect images may be made invisible.

In addition, in the characterizing section 109SG, a mode in which the movable body motion effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect of super reach has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of executing the movable body motion effect is The timing other than during the reach performance of the super reach may be used. For example, as modification 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. It is also possible to make it possible to execute the movable body action effect during the period from reaching the ready-to-win state to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 40-36(B), the movable body motion suggesting effect is first started after reaching reach, and in the image display device 5, the ready-to-win effect to be executed after this is highly expected (big hit). The ratio of being controlled to the game state is high) reach production (for example, reach production of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the characteristic part 109SG) and low expectation (jackpot game state ) reach effect (for example, the reach effect with a lower expectation than the reach effects of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the characteristic portion 109SG) As a branching effect for informing whether to branch to or not, the branching effect for displaying an image of a character with eyes closed is shown in FIG. The characters are gradually enlarged and displayed.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display that executes a low-expectation ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIGS. The display area of the image display device 5 gradually darkens without opening the eyes of the character. That is, in the branching effect, the characters displayed on the image display device 5 turn dark without opening their eyes, so that the high-expectation ready-to-win effect is not executed (the low-expectation ready-to-win effect is executed). be notified. Then, after the display area of the image display device 5 is completely darkened (after the branch effect is finished), the low-expectation ready-to-win effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display that executes a high-expectation ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIGS. It is reported that the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect will be executed by the character opening his/her eyes. In addition, at this time, a movable body motion presentation is also executed. After the movable body action effect and the branch effect are finished, the ready-to-reach effect with high expectation is executed.

In other words, the movable body action effect may be executed as an effect for notifying that the game state is controlled to a big win as illustrated in the characteristic portion 109SG, but it notifies that the ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation is to be executed. You may perform as production|presentation (production|production which alert|reports that the expectation degree controlled by a jackpot game state is high).

In this modification 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 40-36(B) and 40-37(C), the image display device 5 gradually enlarges and displays the character whose eyes are closed as a branch effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At the same time, by displaying an effect image such as concentration lines, the player may be made to pay attention to whether or not the character opens its eyes.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 109SG, during the ready-to-win production of super reach, an example is given in which the present invention is applied as a branch to determine whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. As shown, the present invention may be applied as a branch as to which of the ready-to-win effect with a low expectation and the ready-to-win effect with a high expectation is executed. In this case, the specific image in the present invention is the image of the character (the first specific image is the image of the character with its eyes closed, and the second specific image is the image of the character with its eyes open), and the effect image in the present invention. corresponds to the image such as the above-described saturated lines.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 40-36 and 40-37, in the present modification 109SG-8, when the movable body action effect is executed as an effect for notifying that the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect is to be executed, Although a mode in which the movable body action suggesting effect is executed before the movable body action effect is executed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body action suggesting effect may not be executed. Further, the execution ratio of the movable body motion presentation may be different between when the movable body motion suggestive presentation is executed and when it is not performed (the rate at which the ready-to-win performance with high expectation is executed is different). (Description of Characteristic Portion 162SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 162SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 162SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic portion 162SG has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine 1 of the basic configuration described above, and the same configuration denoted by the same reference numeral as the basic configuration is described here. Description will be omitted, and the characteristic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the characteristic portion 162SG different from the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

FIG. 41-1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic portion 162SG. As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 41-1, in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic portion 162SG, the predetermined A variable display time extension (to be described later) for adjusting the number of game balls to be paid out (given to the player) in a unit period due to determination of a high-ball output state at the lower left position of the game area, which is a position. A high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 for notifying that adjustment or jackpot period extension adjustment is being executed by lighting is provided so as to be visible to the player.

These high ball state notification LEDs 162SG071 are connected to the main board 11 like the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20, and the main substrate 11 (game control microcomputer 100) executes a ball output state determination process (see FIGS. 41-13), which will be described later, to control lighting/extinguishing. The control cycle of the display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 is the same cycle.

Thus, in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic part 162SG, the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment are executed by determining the high ball output state by lighting the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071. can be confirmed (understood).

FIG. 41-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature part 162SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 41-2(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 41-2 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 41-2(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is "loss", "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 41-2(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko game machine 162SG001, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command 96XXH is a payout state designation command for designating the determination status of the payout state determination in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. As shown in FIG. 41-2(C), different EXT data are set in the payout state designation command according to the judgment status of the payout state judgment. As a specific example, the command 9600H is set as a ball output state 1 designation command corresponding to a low ball output state that is not determined as a high ball output state, and the command 9601H is set so that the number of consecutive jackpots is the first determination number (5 times) and less than the second determination count (10 times). A command for designating the ball output state 3 corresponding to the determination state determined as the second high ball output state, which is the number of times of 2 determination (10 times) or more, is used.

The command 97XXH is a command for notifying the post-judgment consecutive game count, which is the number of times the jackpot state occurred in the high-ball game state determined after being judged as the high-ball-out state, and corresponds to the post-determination consecutive game count. By setting the EXT data, the number of consecutive games after determination is specified on the effect control board 12 side by the EXT data.

The command 98XXH is a command for notifying the post-judgment variable display remaining number of times (including the number of variable displays after the end of the high base state) executed after being judged as the high ball state. By setting the EXT data corresponding to the number of display remaining times, the post-determination variable display remaining number of times is specified on the effect control board 12 side by the EXT data.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10") to be described later, Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big hit" as a result of judgment at the time of winning, the judgment result of the big hit type (probable variation, non-probability variation, or sudden probability) and whether it will be a small hit. is. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 41-2(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count that a notification command of passage, probability variation control, and time saving control are performed is performed.

FIG. 41-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 41-3, in this characteristic portion 162SG, on the main board 11 side, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big hit" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 41-4(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this characteristic portion 162SG, as the display result determination table, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big win" to the big win game state is referred to for determining based on the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result. table.

In the display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 162SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), a special figure A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss".

In the display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big win" to the big win game state. It is data for judgment assigned to. In the display result determination table 1 in the present characteristic portion 162SG, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "jackpot ” is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 162SG001, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 162SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 162SG). /30). That is, in the display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or the time-saving state. is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that

FIG. 41-4(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. The display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small winning" is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 162SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), special figures A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "small win".

In the display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state. It is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the display result determination table 2 in the characterizing portion 162SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small win" differs between the special game of the first special figure and the second special figure. Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 41-5(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 162SG selects any of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 Special symbol game by special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for judging the jackpot type is “non-probability variable jackpot”, “probability variable jackpot A”, “ It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in this feature part 162SG with reference to FIG. 41-5(B), in this feature part 162SG, as the jackpot type, high accuracy control and time saving control are performed after the jackpot gaming state is finished. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and high probability low base state in which high probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, the "variable probability big hit A" may be called a 10 round (10R) variable probability big hit, and the "variable probability big hit B" may be called a 5 round (5R) probability variable big hit. Furthermore, in the big-hit game based on the "probability-variable big-hit C", two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning-ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated, and a special It is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 seconds). In addition, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, the variable probability control and the time saving control are not executed.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic part 162SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is the same as the probability variable big win C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this characteristic portion 162SG). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

In other words, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when it is determined to be "variable probability big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same variation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 41-6) In addition, as a result of the variable display, the chance number is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same. , It is impossible to distinguish whether it is a ``variable probability big win C'' in which the variable probability control is executed or a ``minor win'' in which the previous game state is continued without executing the variable probability control, so the variable probability big win C cannot be distinguished. After the end of the big win game or the small win game, the game can be continued while making the player expect that the variable probability control is executed.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the variable probability big win A and the variable probability big win B are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 162SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In addition, the jackpot that occurred in the low base state may be described as the first jackpot (first hit), and the jackpot that occurred in the time-saving state (high probability high base state and low probability high base state) It may be described as "Shoatari". In addition, the period of the big hit state and the high base state from when the first big hit (first hit) occurs to when it is controlled to the normal state after that is also called a continuous period (advantageous period). In this characteristic part 162SG, even if the variable probability big hit C occurs, it is not controlled to a high base after the big win, so the variable probability big win C is not regarded as the first big win (first hit), and the big hit is made in the variable probability state after the variable probability big win C. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The subsequent period of the high-probability-low base state may also be included in the consecutive period (advantageous period).

In addition, although not implemented in this characteristic portion 162SG, instead of the variable probability big hit C, a sudden time-saving big hit that makes the game state after the big hit a low probability high base state may be provided. Suddenly, the short-time jackpot becomes the first jackpot (first hit).

Further, for example, when a time-saving pattern (for example, a stop pattern of 137 or a stop pattern dedicated to time-saving not displayed in variable display) is derived and displayed as a stop pattern, a round game is executed to open the special variable winning ball device 7. In the case of direct control from the normal state to the high base state in this way, the start of the high base state is the timing of the start of the consecutive period (advantageous period). becomes.

In other words, the consecutive period (advantageous period) is the period from when the normal state is controlled to either the jackpot state (advantageous state) or the high base state (special state) until the time when it is controlled to the normal state after that. is.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 41-5 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which there are few prize balls to be obtained is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 41-5 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 41-6 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 162SG. In this characteristic portion 162SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present characteristic portion 162SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach variation pattern, a plurality of super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . may be provided.

In addition, the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 162SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 41-6, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 162SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the present characteristic unit 162SG, as will be described later, the type of the variation pattern is first determined, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random number for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 41-7 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 162SG. In this characterizing section 162SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41-7, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is used to determine the variation pattern. is determined from PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot) and PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach jackpot). Also, if the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 41-7, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B differ in the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 and PB1-2. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 498 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 747 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. That is, in the present characteristic portion 162SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, the variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot PB1. Since it is determined to be -2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). That is, in the present characteristic portion 162SG, the variable display is performed in the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variable big win C or the small win, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable probability big win C or a small win.

Also, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach fluctuation pattern) and PA2-2 (super reach fluctuation pattern) using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss do.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Use the fluctuation pattern determination table C to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach out) and PA2-2 (super reach out of fluctuation pattern) do.

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 Determined from (shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic unit 162SG is "missing", the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is performed more frequently due to the shortening fluctuation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

Next, the relationship between the variation pattern and the ball output state will be described with reference to FIG. 41-8. The ball output state flag in FIG. 41-8 is a flag updated by the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. A flag which is set to "1" in the case of the high-ball output state and "2" in the case of the second high-ball-output state. It is possible to specify whether the state is a low-ball-out state, a first high-ball-out state, or a second high-ball-out state.

The variable display time of each variation pattern corresponding to the low ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "0" is the same as the variable display time of each variation pattern shown in FIG. The variable display time corresponding to the state flag set to "0" is not extended, but the variation pattern corresponding to the first high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "1" is variable. The display time is a variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) with high appearance frequency, and the non-reach loss (PA1-1 to PA1- When the variable display time longer than the variable display time of the variation pattern in 4) is set and extended, and the ball output state flag is set to "1", these extended variable display times are not changed. By executing the out-of-reach variable display, the average variable display time becomes longer.

In addition, the variable display time of the variation pattern corresponding to the second high ball output state in which "2" is set in the ball output state flag is the non-reach loss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) with high appearance frequency and the normal reach. Loss (PA2-1) and normal reach jackpot (PB1-1) variation pattern variable display time corresponds to "1" in ball output state flag Non-reach loss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) and normal reach loss ( PA2-1) and a variable display time longer than the variable display time of the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot are set and extended, and when the ball output state flag is set to "2", these are extended. The average variable display time is further lengthened by executing the variable display of non-reach loss, normal reach loss, and normal reach jackpot of the variable display time.

The extended variable display time is 1 second in the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "1" for the non-reach PA1-1, which is the non-shortened variation pattern. It is 1.5 seconds in the second high ball output state where the state flag is "2". is 0.5 seconds in the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "2", and 1.0 second in the second high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "2". Regarding -1 and PB1-1, it is 0 seconds in the first high-ball-out state where the ball-out state flag is "1", and in the second high-ball-out state where the ball-out state flag is "2". 5 seconds.

It should be noted that the length of the variable display time to be extended shown in FIG. 41-8 is an example, and an extension different from these lengths may be performed. For example, in the second high ball output state, the extension may be longer than in the first high ball output state.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 41-8, by extending the variation pattern of non-reach loss with high execution frequency due to the high determination ratio and the variation pattern of normal reach with high execution frequency compared to super reach, In addition to efficiently lengthening the average variable display time, the data capacity can be reduced by storing multiple data by extending the variable display time for reach and super reach fluctuation patterns, which have a large amount of data related to effects due to the long variable display time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, "1 second" is set as a predetermined extension time for all fluctuation patterns. The variable display time may be uniformly added and extended, and a common performance using common performance data may be executed in each variation pattern during the extended period.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 41-8, in the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "1", only the variation pattern of non-reach deviation is extended, and when the ball output state flag is "2" By increasing the variation patterns to be extended in the second high-ball output state so that the reach variation pattern is also extended when a certain second high-ball-out state occurs, the average variable display time is further increased. Although the extension is made to be efficient, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to prevent the control load associated with the extension from excessively increasing by extending only the extension further and preventing the variation pattern of the extension target from changing according to the ball output state. .

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 41-8, not only the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time-saving state (high base state), which is the gaming state in which the variable display is executed in the continuous period, but also the fluctuation pattern described later In order to cope with the case where the continuous game period (advantageous period) is over and the game is controlled to the normal state and then a big hit occurs again with a small number of variable display times, the continuous game period (advantageous period) is finished. In order to extend the variable display in the normal state when the It is not limited to this, and only the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time-saving state (high base state), which is the gaming state in which the variable display is executed during the consecutive game period, may be extended. .

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 162SG, there is a game control data holding area 162SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 162SG150 shown in FIG. 41-9 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 162SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 162SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 162SG153, a game control counter setting unit 162SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 162SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 162SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) occurs, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 162SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 162SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 162SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 162SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags including the above-described ball-out state flag.

The game control timer setting unit 162SG153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control timer setting unit 162SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 162SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. A data holding area 162SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 162SG190 shown in FIG. 41-10 (A) includes a production control flag setting unit 162SG191, a production control timer setting unit 162SG192, a production control counter setting unit 162SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 162SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 162SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main substrate 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 162SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 stores data indicating a timer value in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 162SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 162SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 162SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

Furthermore, in the start-up winning command buffer 162SG194A of the characteristic part 162SG, whether or not the display pattern has not been determined in accordance with the determination of whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the pre-reading notice setting process (FIG. 39). Or, in other words, due to the occurrence of a new start winning prize, the determination of the display pattern is undecided due to the newly stored starting entrance winning designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and pending memory number notification command. A display undecided flag indicating a, a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display is set, and a first special figure pending memory and a second special figure pending memory Each corresponding to A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with the buffer number.

In addition, in the reception command buffer 162SG194A at the time of start winning of this characteristic part 162SG, a storage area so that the effect limit flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured for each storage area (entry). It should be noted that the effect limit flag means that in the command analysis process (Fig. 41-22), the start winning occurred at the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, but the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, the number of reserved memories This is a flag indicating that the entry is not subject to the pre-reading notice effect when the notification command is not received within a first reserved storage number notification waiting time or a second reserved storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later.

If execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display pattern of the reserved memory display is stored in the reserved display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, When the execution of the reading notice effect is determined, a special mode different from the normal display mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) is set, the reserved memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U. , and in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

At the time of start winning to the first start winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning (the entry with the youngest buffer number). go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A shown in FIG. 41-10(B) is an entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 41-10 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, based on FIG. 41-11, the game control main processing of this characterizing portion 162SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 41-11, even in the game control main process of this feature part 162SG, almost the same process as the game control main process in the basic configuration of FIG. 34 is executed, but the game control main process of this feature part 162SG The point is that the contents of the recovery process in S4 are different, and in addition to the initialization process in step S6a, the process in step S6b regarding the initial setting of the ball output state flag is added.

In the recovery process of step S4 of the game control main process of the characterizing portion 162SG, a process of recovering the ball output state flag to the state before the power interruption is executed. In addition, as will be described later, in the power interruption process of step S19 in the game control timer interrupt process of the feature part 162SG shown in FIG. It contains the data of the flag value of the ball output state flag at the time.

As a specific recovery state of the ball payout state flag, when the value of the ball payout state flag is "0" corresponding to the low ball payout state at the time of power failure, the ball payout state flag is set to "0" by the recovery process. is set, and when the value of the ball payout state flag is "1" corresponding to the first ball payout state at the time of power failure, the ball payout state flag is set to "1" by the restoration process, and when the power failure occurs When the value of the paid-out state flag is "2" corresponding to the second paid-out state, the recovery processing sets the put-out state flag to "2". That is, by the recovery processing in S4, the value of the ball payout state flag is set to the value before the power cutoff, and the ball payout state before the power cutoff is restored.

The above-mentioned backup data also includes data on the post-judgment number of consecutive visits and the post-judgment variable display remaining number, which will be described later. The data at the time of power failure is restored by the restoration process.

In this way, the value of the ball-out status flag is restored to the value before the power failure by the restoration processing in step S4, and the data of the number of consecutive games after judgment and the number of variable display remaining numbers after judgment are restored. Even if a power failure occurs in the first ball delivery state or the second ball delivery state in which the ball delivery speed is adjusted, the adjustment of the ball delivery speed is not terminated by the power failure, and the power failure is restored. is also continued.

On the other hand, since the recovery condition is not satisfied in step S3, the initialization process of step S6a is executed, and the initial setting (including initialization of various game data such as the number of consecutive games) is executed when the power is turned on. Afterwards, the ball payout state flag is set to "0", which is a value corresponding to the low ball payout state, which is the initial value when the power is turned on. In this way, when the power supply is turned on when the power failure recovery condition is not satisfied (when the power supply is started other than the power failure recovery), the value "0" corresponding to the low ball payout status is set to the ball payout status flag. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inappropriate adjustment of the ball delivery speed when the power is turned on.

Next, based on FIG. 41-12, the timer interrupt processing for game control of this characterizing portion 162SG will be described. The game control timer interrupt process of this characterizing portion 162SG executes each process of steps S21 to S27 in the same manner as the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 35 in the basic configuration, but in addition to these processes, the basic configuration , differs in that it has power-off processing in step S19 omitted, and ball-out state determination processing, which is a feature of the timer interrupt processing for game control of this characterizing portion 162SG.

In the power-off processing of step S19, it is detected whether or not a power-off signal has been output from the power supply board 17 (whether or not the power supply has been turned on). The power-off signal is a signal that is output when, for example, a power monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply substrate 17 detects a drop in the voltage of the supplied power. When it is detected that the power-off signal has been output, as described above, the state of the pachinko game machine 162SG001 includes the above-described ball output state flag and the like necessary for restoring the state at the time of the power failure. Each game data is stored as backup data in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. If it is not detected that the power-off signal has been output, the power-off processing is terminated. After executing the ball output state determination process of step S20, each process of steps S21 to S27 is executed.

Here, the ball output state determination processing in step S20 of the characteristic portion 162SG will be described with reference to FIG. 41-13(a). FIG. 41-13(a) is a flow chart showing an example of the contents of the ball-out state determination process in step S20.

In the ball output state determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 first determines whether the value of the ball output state flag is "0", that is, whether the ball output state is the low ball output state or the first high ball output state. It is determined whether it is the state or the second high-ball state (step 162SGS01).

When the value of the ball output state flag is "0" (step 162SGS01; Y), the number of consecutive games stored in the game control data holding area 162SG150 of the RAM 102 is the first judgment number of "5" or more. It is determined whether or not there is (step 162SGS02). If it is not equal to or greater than the first judgment number of "5", that is, if it is not in the state of consecutive residences or if it is in the state of consecutive residences but the number of consecutive residences is less than 5 (step 162SGS02; N), The ball output state determination processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive residences is equal to or greater than the first determination number of "5" (step 162SGS02; Y), it is further determined whether or not the number of consecutive residences is equal to or greater than the second determination number of "10". Determine (step 162SGS03).

When the number of consecutive games is not equal to or greater than the second judgment number of "10" (Step 162SGS03; N), that is, when the number of consecutive games reaches "5" which is the first judgment number of times, the first ball is put out. 41-13(b), the first stage adjustment is started (step 162SGS07). ). As will be described later, the number of consecutive games is updated in the jackpot ending process. Therefore, the fifth jackpot of the number of consecutive games is a jackpot for which the adjustment for the extension of the jackpot period is not executed in the first stage. The jackpot period extension adjustment is executed for the jackpots of the 6th to 10th consecutive games.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 41-21, the jackpot period extension adjustment is a fanfare effect period at the start of the jackpot state, which is a period in which the special variable prize ball device 7 constituting the jackpot is not opened, and the end of the round game. The interval period from the start of the next round game to the start of the next round game, and the ending performance period at the end of the jackpot state are extended from the low ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "0", so that the same number of game balls By extending the period of the jackpot game in which is paid out, the number of game balls paid out per unit time is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 41-21, the extension length of the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period is set to be longer than the first high ball payout state in which the ball payout state flag is set to "1". The second high ball output state in which the ball state flag is set to "2" is set longer, and the jackpot period extension adjustment in the first high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "1" is , The extension length is a relatively short first stage jackpot period extension adjustment, and the jackpot period extension adjustment of the second high ball output state in which "2" is set in the ball output state flag is the extension length is relatively It is a long second stage jackpot period extension adjustment.

Then, the lighting of the high-ball state notification LED 162SG071 is started to start notification that the high-ball state has been reached (step 162SGS08), and the number of variable display times after the high-ball state is determined is a predetermined number. A post-judgment variable display remaining number of times (100) for specifying the remaining number of times until reaching 100 times is set, and the number of consecutive hits that occurred after being judged as a high-ball state is set. After setting the initial value "0" to the number of times (step 162SGS09), the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, the form in which the predetermined number of times is 100 times is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be changed as appropriate.

On the other hand, when the number of consecutive residences is equal to or greater than the second judgment number of "10" (Step 162SGS03; Y), that is, when the number of consecutive residences reaches the second judgment number of "10", the second ball is put out. It was determined that the state was established, and the ball output state flag was set to "2" corresponding to the second ball output state (step 162SGS04), and the second stage adjustment was started as shown in Fig. 41-13(b). After that (step 162SGS05), go to step 162SGS17. Since the number of consecutive games is updated in the jackpot ending process as will be described later, the second-stage jackpot period extension adjustment is executed for the jackpot after the 11th consecutive game.

Also, if the value of the ball output status flag is not "0" (step 162SGS01; N), whether or not the number of consecutive games after determination is 10 times or more, which is the number of termination determinations for ending the adjustment, In other words, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive residences after determination has reached 10, which is the end determination number (step 162SGS10). In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, the number of times of end determination is exemplified as 10 times, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be changed as appropriate.

If the number of consecutive games after determination is 10 times or more, which is the end determination number (step 162 SGS10; N), that is, after the number of times of consecutive games is 5 times or more and it is determined to be a high-ball state, the state of consecutive games will be changed. When the number of consecutive game jackpots generated without ending reaches 10 times, it is determined whether or not the game state is a low base state, that is, whether or not the consecutive game state is finished. (Step 162SGS11) If the gaming state is the low base state (Step 162SGS11; Y), the process proceeds to Step 162SGS13. It should be noted that the number of consecutive residences is reset when the consecutive residence state ends and the low base state is entered.

On the other hand, if the post-determination number of consecutive residences is not 10 times or more, which is the end determination number of times (step 162SGS10; N), or the post-determination number of consecutive residences is 10 times or more, which is the end determination number of times (step 162SGS10; Y). If the game state is not the low base state (step 162SGS11; N), it is further determined whether or not the post-judgment variable display remaining number set in step 162SGS09 is "0" (step 162SGS12).

If the post-judgment variable display remaining number is not "0" (step 162SGS12; N), that is, the variable display of 100 times, which is the predetermined number, after the number of consecutive games is 5 or more and it is judged to be in a high-ball state. is not executed, the ball-out state determination processing is terminated.

When the post-judgment variable display remaining number of times is "0" (step 162SGS12; Y), that is, when the variable display has been executed 100 times, which is the predetermined number of times, after being judged as a high ball output state, Go to step 162 SGS13.

In step 162SGS13, by updating the ball payout state flag to "0", after completing the adjustment of the first stage or the second stage (step 162SGS14), lighting of the high ball payout state notification LED 162SG071 is ended. After completing the notification that the adjustment is being carried out in the state of high ball output (step 162SGS15), the post-judgment variable display remaining number and the post-judgment consecutive game number are reset (step 162SGS16), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. .

In step 162SGS17, after execution of transmission setting of a ball payout state designation command corresponding to the value of the ball payout state flag set in any one of step 162SGS04, step 162SGS06 and step 162SGS13, the ball payout state is determined. End the process. Incidentally, the ball output state designation command set for transmission in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG.

41-13(a) is executed as described above, the value of the ball output state flag changes as shown in FIG. 41-13(b). Similarly, if it is "0", neither the variable display time extension adjustment for extending the variable display time nor the jackpot period extension adjustment for extending the period of the jackpot game is executed. When the value of the ball output state flag is updated to "1" by determining the high ball output state, the variable display time is extended to the length of the first stage. Extension of the variable display time of the first stage Both the adjustment and the first stage jackpot period extension adjustment in which the period of the jackpot game is extended to the length of the first stage are executed. Furthermore, when the value of the ball output state flag is updated to "2" by determining the second high ball output state in the ball output state determination process, a second stage having a variable display time longer than the first stage is displayed. Both the second stage variable display time extension adjustment extended to the stage length and the second stage jackpot period extension adjustment extended to the second stage length longer than the first stage jackpot game period. The fact that these adjustments are being made is notified by the lighting of the high-ball state notification LED 162SG071.

Furthermore, when the value of the ball output status flag is "1" or "2", when the number of consecutive games after determination reaches the end determination number of times, or when the variable display remaining number after determination becomes 0 (ball output status flag is set to "1" or "2" and the variable display is executed 100 times), the value of the ball output status flag is updated to "0" and the variable display time extension adjustment and jackpot period Extension adjustment ends.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 162SG, a mode is exemplified in which the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 is turned on from the timing when the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "0" to "1", but the present invention is based on this. However, the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 does not turn on from the timing when the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "0" to "1" during a normal game, and the ball output state flag is changed. If a power failure occurs while the value is set to "1" or "2", it may be lit only for a certain period of time after the power failure is restored.

In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" or "2", the form of executing both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment was exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" or "2", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be performed. Furthermore, when the value of the ball output state flag is "1", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed, and the value of the ball output state flag is "2". In some cases, both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be performed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 162SG, as shown in FIG. 41-13(a), the CPU 103 transmits a ball output state specifying command to the performance control board 12 only when the value of the ball output state flag changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it transmit to. Furthermore, in the characterizing section 162SG, a mode in which the ball-out state designation command is provided as a part of the effect control command has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of these ball-out state designation commands, , a game state specifying command corresponding to each state of payout balls (low payout state, first high payout state, second high payout state) may be provided.

Next, the start prize determination process of the characterizing portion 162SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. 41-14. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 162SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 162SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 162SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 162SG154, it should be able to identify the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 162SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 162SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is set to "1" ( step 162 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 162SGS101 (step 162SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit in step 162SGS102 (step 162SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( step 162 SGS 104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 162SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 162SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, it is sufficient to be able to specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. In step 162SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit (step 162SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is set to "2" ( step 162 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 162SGS103 and step 162SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 162SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 162SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of step 162SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 162 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 162 SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A, while when the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 162 SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 162SGS110, the transmission setting of the start-up prize designation command according to the start-up buffer value is performed (step 162SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 162 SGS111, the winning random number determination processing is executed (step 162 SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 162SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 162SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 162SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the starting buffer value is "2" (step 162SGS114; N), after clearing the starting buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 162SGS116), End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 41-15(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 162SGS112 of FIG. 41-14 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 162SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 36, FIGS. result) is regarded as "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 36, FIG. 41-17), which will be described later, the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 162 SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

FIG. 41-15 (A) in the random number determination process at the time of winning, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU103) first, for example, the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 The current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is identified by checking it (step 162SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that the time saving state is when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 162SGS121, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 41-4 is selected and set (step 162SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 162SGS109 in FIG. 41-14 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 162SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 162 SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each judgment value. can be determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined in step 162SGS123 that it is not within the big hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not result in a big hit (step 162SGS123; N), the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 41-4 is changed. Select and set (step 162SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 162SGS109 in FIG. 41-14 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 162SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 162 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command which is the symbol designation command according to the event (step 162SGS126), select and set the special hit variation pattern determination table (step 162SGS127), and proceed to step 162SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 162 SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 162 SGS 129). If the time saving flag is off (step 162SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 162SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 162SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to these variation pattern determination table A and D, the characteristic portion 162SG includes a variation pattern determination table B for loss, which is used when the number of pending memories is 3. , and the deviation variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. , In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. In the variation pattern determination tables B and C, a value exceeding 0 to A is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range of possible random number values MR3 for variation pattern determination. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 97 small judgment values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. .

Therefore, in step 162SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

Further, when it is determined in step 162SGS123 that it is within the big hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that a big hit will occur during variable display (step 162SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 41-15(A) , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 162 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, the symbol designation command according to the determined big hit type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit A, the third symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit B, and the probability variation big hit C in the case of the probability variation big hit C Executes the transmission setting of the fourth symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the fifth symbol designation command (step 162 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (Step 162 SGS 134a). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 162SGS134a; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 162SGS135), and step Go to 162SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not the non-probability variable jackpot (step 162SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether the determined jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (step 162SGS134b).

If the determined jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (step 162 SGS 134b; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 162SGS136), go to step 162SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not the variable probability big hit A or the variable probability big hit B (step 162 SGS134b; N), that is, if the determined jackpot type is the variable probability big hit C, select and set the variation pattern determination table for special winning. (step 162SGS137) and proceeds to step 162SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 162SGS127, step 162SGS130, step 162SGS131, step 162SGS135, step 162SGS136, and step 162SGS137, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is used to determine a variation category according to the range of determination values including the random number MR3 (step 162SGS138). In this characteristic portion 162SG, as shown in FIG. 41-15 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", regardless of the total number of pending memories, the variable display mode of "non-reach" is common. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode (for example, normal reach) other than "non-reach" and "super reach" A variable category of "other" is provided, It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 162SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 162SGS132), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIG. 41-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed at S110 of FIG. 36 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 41-16, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 162SGS141). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 162SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting section 162SG154 and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; N), the second special figure pending storage unit 162SG151B holds stored corresponding to the holding number "1" As data, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 162SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 162 SGS142, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, subtract 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Along with updating so as to allow, update the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B The indicated reserved data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162SGS143).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 162SGS144), it moves to step 162SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" at step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 162SGS145). . The number of first special figure reserved storage is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 162SGS145, read the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, it is determined whether the read value is "0". Just do it. Thus, the processing of step 162SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 162SGS141, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 162SGS145 (step 162SGS145; N), the first special figure pending storage unit 162SG151A Hold stored corresponding to the hold number "1" As data, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 162SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 162 SGS146, by subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., the 1st special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are subtracted by 1 Along with updating so as to allow, update the data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A. Specifically, the random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A The pending data shown is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162SGS147).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (step 162SGS148), it moves to step 162SGS149.

In step 162 SGS149, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. select and set. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss" , determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss" (step 162 SGS 150a). In addition, in this step 162SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (variable probability state) in which the variable probability flag is on, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a high probability state (variable probability state ), it is determined as a “big hit” if it falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, and if not, it is determined as a “loss”. Also, if the probability variation flag is off low probability state, if the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined as "big hit", and if not, it is determined as "off" judge.

Thus, in the display result determination table 1 selected in step 162SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "jackpot" corresponding to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. In the processing of 162SGS 150a, depending on whether the gaming state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high probability state, using different determination data (determination value), the special figure display result is " By determining whether or not to be a "big hit", when the game state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) as a "big hit" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined to be a "jackpot" at step 162SGS150a (step 162SGS150a; Y), the game control flag setting section 162SG152 turns on the jackpot flag (step 162SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 41-5(A) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step 162 SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table A”, “variable probability big win B”, and “variable probability big win C”, according to which one of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches, it is determined which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be (step 162 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of step 162 SGS154, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to either a time-saving state or a probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time-saving state. It is determined before deriving the fixed special symbol as a result of variable display whether to control to . Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 (step 162SGS155), the determined jackpot type memorize As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable big hit" corresponding to non-probable variable big hit, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable big hit A, it is set to "1". If it is "variable probability B" corresponding to B, it is "2", and if it is "variable probability C" that corresponds to variable probability big hit C, it is "3".

On the other hand, when it is determined that the result is not a "big hit" at step 162SGS150a (step 162SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b to select and set the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 41-4. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure It is determined whether or not the display result is to be a "small hit" (step 162SGS150c). In addition, in step 162SGS150c, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" using the judgment value corresponding to the first special figure. , When the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

When it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" in step 162SGS150c (step 162SGS150c; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 is turned on (step 162SGS151).

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" in step 162SGS150c (step 162SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS156.

In step 162 SGS156, whether or not to control to the big hit game state (whether the big hit flag is turned on) as a result of pre-determination, whether to control to the small hit game state (whether the small hit flag is turned on) Determined special symbols are set according to the result of prior determination of (whether or not the game is played) and the result of determination of the type of jackpot in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" at step 162SGS150a, if the big hit type at step 162SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is displayed. Set as a fixed special pattern. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B", a special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "small hit", a special symbol showing the symbol "2", which is a small winning symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these fixed special symbols are examples, and fixed special symbols other than these may be set, and a plurality of types of symbols may be set as the fixed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step 162SGS156, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 162SGS157), the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

It should be noted that when the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure in step 162SGS145 is "0" (step 162SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step 162SGS158), End the special symbol normal process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

FIG. 41-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 36 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 41-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 162SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether the specified jackpot type is "variable probability big hit C" (step 162 SGS163), and if it is not "variable probability big hit C", that is, "variable probability big hit A", "variable probability big hit B", "non In the case of either "probability variable jackpot" (step 162 SGS163; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A or the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and the specified jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" or "probability variable jackpot B". , the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the identified jackpot type is "variable probability jackpot C" (step 162SGS163; Y), a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 162SGS165).

In the judgment in step 162SGS161, if the big hit flag is not turned on (step 162SGS161; N), it is further judged whether or not the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166). If the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166; Y), select and set the special hit variation pattern determination table (step 162SGS167), and proceed to step 162SGS175.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS166; N), by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152, the game state is a probability variable state or a time saving It is determined whether or not the time saving control is in progress (step 162SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 162 SGS168; Y), select and set the deviation pattern determination table D as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns ( step 162 SGS 169).

On the other hand, when it is not during the time saving control, that is, when the time saving flag is not turned on (step 162SGS168; N), for example provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, storage of the pending memory number counter of the variable special figure By reading the value or the like, the number of pending storage of the fluctuation special figure is specified, and it is determined whether or not the specified number of holding storage of the specified fluctuation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170).

When the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 162 SGS170; N), as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss Select and set (step 162SGS171).

In addition, when the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 162SGS172 ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 162 SGS172; Y), the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss is selected as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. (Step 162SGS173).

Also, if the number of pending memories of the identified fluctuation special figure is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 4 (step 162 SGS172; N), the fluctuation pattern is any of a plurality of types Select and set the variation pattern determination table C for failure as the table used for determining .

After executing any of the processes of step 162SGS164, step 162SGS165, step 162SGS167, step 162SGS169, step 162SGS171, step 162SGS173, and step 162SGS174, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern stored in, for example, the random number buffer for variation Based on the numerical data indicating, by referring to any of the selected (set) variation pattern determination table for the big hit, the variation pattern determination table for the special hit, or the variation pattern determination table for the loss A to D, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 162SGS175). It should be noted that even if the variation pattern determined in this case is the same variation pattern, if the value of the ball-out state flag at that time is "1", the variation pattern corresponding to the first high-ball-out state is determined. When the variation pattern of the variable display time adjusted by one step is determined, and the value of the ball output state flag at that time is "2", it corresponds to the second high ball output state. A variation pattern of the variable display time subjected to the second-stage extension adjustment is determined.

That is, in step 162SGS175, the variation pattern of the variable display time is determined according to the value of the ball output state flag.

Incidentally, when the big hit flag is off, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is set to "reach" by determining the variation pattern in the process of step 162SGS175. That is, the process of step 162 SGS170 includes the process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative pattern should be the ready-to-win state when the variable display result is "loss".

After determining the variation pattern in step 162SGS175, according to the variation special symbol designation buffer value, special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B The setting for starting the variation of the special symbols is performed so as to start one of the special symbols games using the second special symbol (step 162SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of step 162SGS176, settings are made for transmitting various commands for when the special symbols start to fluctuate (step 162SGS177). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the game state designation command, the first fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the first pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (top address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is set to the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in . On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the game state designation command, the second fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, and the variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the notification command of the number of second pending memories, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the processing of step 162SGS177, for the variation pattern determined in step 162SGS175, a special figure variable display time, which is a special symbol variable display time corresponding to the value of the ball output state flag, is set (step 162SGS178). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). is the required time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 162SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 162SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. A designation command, a first fluctuation start command or a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command are transmitted in sequence. Become. In addition, the order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. , the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command, or the second reserved memory number notification command.

FIG. 41-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 36 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of step S113 to end the variation of the special symbols, and displays the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 162SGS180). In addition, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the fluctuation of the first special design in the first special design display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the control which transmits the design decision command to production control board 12 is done (step 162SGS181). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS182), and when the big hit flag is turned off (step 162SGS182; N), the small hit flag is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (step 162SGS183).

When the small hit flag is turned on, the effect control board 12 is set to transmit the hit start 5 designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 162 SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time is set in the small hit display time timer (step 162 SGS190b). Also, the number of opening times (for example, two times) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter (step 162SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 162SGS190d), which is the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S118), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is turned on (step 162 SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time saving flag and turns them off (step 162SGS182; Y). 162 SGS 184), hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), hit start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C ), the setting for transmitting the hit start 4 designation command (non-probable variation) is performed (step 162 SGS 185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state specifying command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 162SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time corresponding to the execution period of the fanfare performance for informing the occurrence of the jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 162 SGS187). At this time, as the big win display time set in the big win display time timer, the big win display time corresponding to the ball output state flag is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41-21, if the value of the ball payout state flag is "0", 30000 corresponding to 30000 milliseconds, which is the unextended fanfare effect period corresponding to the low ball payout state. Milliseconds are set as the jackpot display time.

If the value of the ball output state flag is "1", 40000 milliseconds corresponding to 40000 milliseconds which is the fanfare performance period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball output state is set as the jackpot display time, If the value of the ball output state flag is "2", 60000 milliseconds corresponding to 60000 milliseconds which is the fanfare performance period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball output state is set as the jackpot display time. .

Then, set the number of opening times (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability variable jackpot or probability variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of probability variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of probability variable jackpot C) in the big win opening counter. After that (step 162SGS188), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) (step 162SGS189).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS183; N), at step 162SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is "0". It should be noted that, although not particularly illustrated in the present characteristic portion 162SG, the CPU 103, if the jackpot type of the jackpot game ended in the jackpot game end processing is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the probability variation flag and the time saving flag. Both are turned on (the game state is controlled to a high-probability/high-base state) and "0" is set as the value of the time-saving number counter, and the jackpot type of the jackpot game ended in the jackpot game end processing is variable-probability jackpot C. If there is, the variable probability flag is turned on (the game state is controlled to a high probability low base state) and "0" is set as the value of the time saving number counter. Then, when the jackpot type of the jackpot game ended in the jackpot game end processing is the non-probable variable jackpot, the CPU 103 turns on the time saving flag and sets "100" as the value of the time saving number counter. ing. Otherwise, go to step 162 SGS 196 .

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 162 SGS190; N), that is, if the high base state in which the number of time saving times remains, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by -1 (step 162 SGS 191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is "0" (step 162SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 162SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 162SGS193; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, after clearing the time-saving flag to turn off (step 162SGS194), corresponding to the state of the probability variable flag or time-saving flag After setting the transmission setting of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low-probability-low base) (step 162SGS195), the process proceeds to step 162SGS196. It should be noted that the number of consecutive residences is also reset along with the execution of step 162SGS195.

Then, a post-judgment variable display remaining count update process is executed (step 162 SGS 196 ). In this post-judgment variable display remaining number updating process, it is judged whether or not the post-judgment variable display remaining number is "0". If the value is "0" after subtraction, the post-determination variable display remaining count update process is terminated.

Next, in step 162SGS197, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 41-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 36 as the jackpot ending process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (step 162SGS201). When the big win end display timer is not in operation (step 162 SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect for displaying the big win end on the image display device 5 is set as the big win end display time in the big win end display timer. (step 162SGS202), and the process ends.

At this time, as the jackpot end display time set in the jackpot end display timer, a jackpot end display time corresponding to the ball output state flag is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41-21, if the value of the ball payout state flag is "0", a timer corresponding to 60000 milliseconds, which is the unextended ending effect period corresponding to the low ball payout state, is activated. Value is set. Further, if the value of the ball payout state flag is "1", a timer value corresponding to 70000 milliseconds, which is the ending rendering period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball payout state, is set and the ball payout state is set. If the value of the flag is "2", a timer value corresponding to 90000 milliseconds, which is the ending effect period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball output state, is set.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 162SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 162SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stored jackpot type is non-probability variable jackpot (step 162SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not the non-variable probability jackpot (step 162SGS205; N), it is further determined whether or not the stored jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot C (step 162SGS206).

When the stored jackpot type is variable probability jackpot C (step 162SGS206; Y), after turning on the variable probability flag (step 162SGS210), the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, when the stored jackpot type is not the variable probability jackpot C, that is, when the jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B (step 162 SGS206; N), the variable probability flag is turned on (step 162 SGS207), After turning on the time saving flag (step 162SGS208) and setting "0" to the time saving frequency counter (step 162SGS209), the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 162SGS205; Y), by executing steps 162SGS211 and 162SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set to the time saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

In step 162SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and transmission setting of a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is performed (step 162SGS214). Then, transmission setting of a game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability variable flag and the time saving flag which are turned on is performed (step 162 SGS215).

Then, the update processing of the number of consecutive residences and the number of consecutive residences after determination is executed (step 162SGS216). Specifically, in this updating process, it is determined whether the finished jackpot is the first jackpot that occurred in the low base state as described above or the Renso jackpot that occurred in the high base state. It is specified from the value of the state flag before the start of the jackpot corresponding to the state before the occurrence of (“0” for low base, “1” for high base). Set to "1". On the other hand, in the case of a big win for consecutive villas, since the number of consecutive villas has already become a value other than "0", the number of consecutive villas is updated by adding one. Further, in the case of a big hit, if the initial value is set to the number of consecutive games after determination, the number of consecutive games after determination is updated by adding one.

And, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 162SGS217).

In addition, although not shown in particular, in the characteristic part 162SG, when the CPU 103 does not reach the upper limit number of rounds in which the number of times of execution of the round is set in the process after opening the jackpot (step S116), set interval period timer. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41-21, if the value of the ball output state flag is "0", the timer value corresponding to the non-extended interval period of 5000 milliseconds corresponding to the low ball output state set. Also, if the value of the paid ball state flag is "1", a timer value corresponding to 6000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high paid ball state, is set. Also, if the value of the paid ball state flag is "2", a timer value corresponding to 7000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high paid ball state, is set.

After setting these timer values in the interval period timer, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the interval period timer every time the process after opening the jackpot is executed, and the interval period timer is timed out. Along with performing opening control of the winning opening, the value of the special figure process is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the opening of the big hit, that is, a new round game is started.

As described above, in this characterizing portion 162SG, as shown in FIG. 41-20, during the period from the derivation display of the jackpot symbol to the end of the jackpot game based on the derivation display of the jackpot symbol, the ball output state flag is set. Regardless of the value, since the round game continues until a certain open period (for example, 29 seconds) passes or a certain number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls enter the big winning opening, the ball output state flag The number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change according to the value. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 41-20 and 41-21, the game ball cannot enter the big winning hole because the big winning hole is closed, that is, the fanfare effect that it is impossible to win the prize ball The period, the interval period, and the ending effect period are lengthened as the value of the ball output state flag changes from 0→1→2.

For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change according to the value of the ball state flag. The number of prize balls paid out per unit time is increased by changing (prolonging) the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period, which are periods in which winning is not possible, according to the value of the ball output state flag. It is possible to suppress it.

Next, processing that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 41-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 38 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 41-22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 162SGS221).

If there is a received command in step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 162 SGS222). Then, when the command is the first start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS222; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS223). For example, in the process of step 162SGS223, the timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set to the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 Just do it.

If the received command is not the first starting opening winning designation command at step 162SGS222 (step 162SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 162SGS224). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS224; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS225). For example, in the process of step 162 SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time for receiving the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

In step 162SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 162SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 162SGS226). If the received command is not a design designation command at step 162SGS226 (step 162SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 162SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 162SGS227 (step 162SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 162SGS228). Then, when it is the first reserved storage number notification command (step 162SGS228; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step 162SGS229). .

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 162SGS228 (step 162SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 162SGS230). When it is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 162SGS230; Y), the waiting time for notification of the second reserved storage number is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step 162SGS231). .

Then, after executing either of the processes of step 162SGS229 and step 162SGS231, the display undetermined flag of the stored entry is set to "1" indicating that the pending display mode is undetermined (display undetermined flag is turned on), and if there is an unreceived command, the effect limit flag is set to "1" (the display limit flag is turned on) (step 162SGS232).

If the command received at step 162SGS226 is a design designation command (step 162SGS226; Y), or if the command received at step 162SGS227 is a variable category command (step 162SGS227; Y), or step 162SGS223, step 162SGS225, step 162SGS232 After executing any of the processing of 1), the received command is stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A (not shown) (step 162SGS233), and the processing returns to step 162SGS221.

In addition, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning.

If the received command in step 162SGS230 is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 162SGS230; N), after setting according to other received commands (step 162SGS234), the process returns to step 162SGS221. For example, if the received command is a ball-out state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball-out state from the ball-out state designation command in the process of step 162SGS234, A process such as turning on a flag may be executed. By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the ball-out state by referring to the flag.

If there is no received command in the command reception buffer at step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; N), it is determined whether or not the first pending storage count notification waiting time or the second pending storage count notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162 SGS237). If the waiting time for notification of the number of reserved memories or the waiting time for notification of the number of reserved memories has not elapsed (step 162 SGS237; N), the command analysis process is terminated, and the waiting time for notification of the number of reserved memories or the second reserved memory When the number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162SGS237; Y), the display undecided flag of the corresponding entry whose storage has not been completed is set to "1" in the effect restriction flag (the display undecided flag is turned on), End command analysis processing.

FIG. 41-23 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 39 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 41-23, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the reception command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning (step 162SGS241), and whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning. is determined by whether or not there is an entry whose display undecided flag is ON (step 162SGS242a).

If there is no entry whose display undetermined flag is ON (step 162SGS242a; N), proceed to step 162SGS252, and if there is an entry whose display undetermined flag is ON (step 162SGS242a; Y), further determination It is determined whether or not the remaining variable display count is equal to or less than the prefetch limit count (step 162SGS242b). If the post-judgment variable display remaining count is equal to or less than the look-ahead limit count (step 162SGS242b; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set to the pending display flag. set.

Also, if the post-judgment variable display remaining count is greater than the look-ahead limit count (step 162 SGS242b; N), whether or not the effect limit flag of the entry is on (whether "1" is set). is determined (step 162SGS242c). If the effect restriction flag is ON (step 162SGS242c; Y), the process proceeds to step 162SGS250, and as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set to the pending display flag.

On the other hand, if the effect limit flag is off (step 162SGS242b; N), whether the design designation command of the entry is the fourth design designation or the sixth design designation command, that is, the design designation command is a probability variable jackpot It is determined whether or not it is a symbol designating command indicating C or a small hit (step 162 SGS243a). If the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a variable probability big hit C or a small hit (step 162SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is changed. , the pending display flag is set. In other words, the pre-reading announcement effect is not executed with respect to the holding memory for the probability variable big win C or the small win.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit, whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first design designation command, that is, the symbol designation command is a command indicating a loss (Step 162SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (either of the probability variation jackpot A, probability variation jackpot B, or non-probability variation jackpot) (step 162 SGS243b; N), the entry The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command (step 162SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the prediction effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193 and the jackpot type specified in step 162SGS244, the prediction is performed at the time of the jackpot (not shown). By referring to the notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the read advance notice effect and the display pattern in the case of executing the read advance notice effect (step 162SGS245).

In step 162 SGS245, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 41-24(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 41-24(A), the determination ratio of the presence/absence of pre-reading notice effects and the display pattern (notice type) is changed according to the jackpot type specified in the process of step 162 SGS244. .

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (preview type) of the pre-reading preview effect. Among these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display. Displayed in area 5U.

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit other than the probability variable jackpot C, there is no case where the pre-reading notice effect is decided not to be executed, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is always decided and the display pattern (notice type) Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β (announcement type) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 41-24 (A), when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A", the ratio of display pattern β to be determined as the display pattern (notice type) is determined by display pattern α. is set higher than the On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" or "non-probability variable jackpot", the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined. set low.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the variable probability big win A, and the player's expectation for the variable probability big win A can be increased.

In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, when the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than the probability variable jackpot C, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always determining the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect. Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β displayed in a white star (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in cases other than "jackpot", it may be possible to determine non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the same manner as in the case where the variable display result is "loss".

Further, in step 162SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is ON is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a failure (step 162SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The variation category indicated by the variation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is specified (step 162 SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command of the entry is C600H, specify that it is a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is specified and C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation pattern including normal reach.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading announcement effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193, and the category of the variation pattern specified in step 162SGS247 (not shown) Whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the display pattern (notice type) in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect are determined by referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table (step 162 SGS248).

In step 162SGS248, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 41-24(B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 41-24 (B), depending on the category of the variation pattern specified in the process of step 162 SGS247, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview effect and the display pattern (preview type) is set. making it different.

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (notice type). Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is a white square (◇) that is a specific mode in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area. 5U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5D It is displayed in the storage display area 5U. In addition, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be non-execution, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U in a round shape (○) which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 41-24 (B), when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", the rate at which the pre-reading forewarning effect is executed (the rate determined for other than "no forewarning effect") is set higher. In addition, when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", it is more likely than the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "others". The rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed (the rate at which other than "no notice effect" is determined) is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", if the fluctuation category is "other", than if the fluctuation pattern category is "non-reach" Also, the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the percentage of display pattern α determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "others". Furthermore, when the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach" when the category of the variation pattern is "others". The percentage of display pattern β determined is set higher than in the case, and when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other" The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach" is set to be the highest, and the rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to be the lowest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41-24(A), when the variable display result is "big hit", the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no notice effect). The rate at which the advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any of the variation pattern categories when the variable display result is "loss". is set higher than the

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "loss (non-reach)", "loss (super reach)", or "loss (other)", the display pattern α is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variable A)", when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than

With such settings, when the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" than , especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is a "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable big hit A". Since the ratio of , the expectation of the player can be increased.

After execution of step 162SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 162SGS247, that is, determines the display pattern (preview type) to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. (Step 162SGS249).

After step 162 SGS245 is executed or when execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined (step 162 SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 162 SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the pending memory display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS251.

Further, in step 162SGS249, if the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined (step 162SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "o" (step 162SGS250), go to step 162SGS251.

After executing step 162SGS246 or step 162SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undecided flag of the entry to "0" (step 162SGS251). After that, the pending display is updated based on the stored contents of the receive command buffer 162SG194A at the time of start winning (step 162SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the receive command buffer 162SG194A at the time of start winning is displayed in a display mode corresponding to one of "0", "1" and "2" set in the pending display flag. be. Also, when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A are shifted, according to the storage contents of the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A after the shift, the As shown in A), the pending display in the first pending memory display area 5D and the second pending memory display area 5U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41-25 (B), if the first special figure pending memory number is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this reserved memory display, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", the display mode is changed to "○" as shown in FIG. 41-25(B). When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed in the display mode. In addition, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is two, two pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode corresponding to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D. Also, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is three, three pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D. Also, if the number of first special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D.

In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. displayed in the form. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending storage is two, for example, as shown in FIG. As a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag, for example, the second pending memory display in the display mode of "○" for the pending memory display of 1 and the display mode of "☆" for the pending memory display of 1 Displayed in area 5U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is three, three pending storage display is displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 5U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 5U.

Each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory is reduced (consumed), and as shown in FIG. 162SG shifts toward the center of the screen).

In other words, if the pending memory in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A is shifted by consuming the pending memory in the variable display start setting process, which is executed at the start of the variable display and will be described later, the variable display starting time after the shift is shifted. Based on the pending memory of the received command buffer 162SG194A, the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 5D and the second pending memory display area 5U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new pending memory due to the start winning. , the display pattern of the reserved memory is determined and set to the reserved display flag, and the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5D are displayed in a display mode according to the flag value set to the reserved display flag. It comes to be displayed in the storage display area 5U.

In addition, in this characterizing section 162SG, the processing of step 162SGS252 is exemplified in the pre-reading notice setting processing, but the present invention is not limited to this. And the process for updating the pending display in the second pending storage display area 5U may be executed separately as a process (for example, pending display update process) different from the pre-reading notice setting process.

In addition, in the characteristic part 162SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in step 162SGS242, execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the holding storage at the starting winning is determined. New storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 162SGS242 due to the simultaneous occurrence of the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening If it is determined that there is, that is, if the entry whose display undecided flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage, both entries are pre-read notice It is a target for determining whether to execute the performance or not. Both the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the first special plan is newly stored and the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special plan are newly stored are stored depending on whether the pre-reading notice effect is executed or not. In the case of a determination target, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the pending display of the pending storage of the first special symbol and the pending display of the second special symbol There is a case where the pre-reading forewarning effects are simultaneously executed in both displays.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, as described above, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is Both the newly stored pending memory and the newly stored pending memory command at the time of starting winning in the second special figure are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect, but the present invention is this In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan Only one of them may be determined to execute.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special symbol is suspended in the second special symbol. Priority is given to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading foretelling effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan is unambiguously determined to be non-execution, and the first special plan When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution and non-execution of pre-reading notice effect in pending storage in the second special figure is determined with priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice performance in the reserved storage in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan, it is unambiguously decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, and the second special plan When it is determined not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

41-26 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is ON (step 162SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 162SGS271; Y), to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 162 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off at step 162SGS271 (step 162SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 162SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning, 1 buffer number each Shift up (step 162SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 162SGS272 or step 162SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 162SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 162SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the characteristic part 162SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit C, the stopping symbol is the same chance number as the small hit, such as "334" or "778". decide from In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, select a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, "334", "778", etc., which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C, are used as stop symbols. decide from Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the first variable display result specifying command corresponding to the loss, if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, the three patterns are irregular as the stop pattern. It is a pattern, and a combination (losing pattern) other than the above-described chance eye is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern, a combination of reach-lost decorative patterns such as "121" and "464" (losing pattern) ).

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 41-27 to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect in the variable display (step 162SGS277). In addition, in the present characterizing section 162SG, in the announcement effect determination processing, as will be described later, one of the four announcement effects A to D is exemplified. is not limited to this, and the number of executable notice effects may be 3 or less or 5 or more.

In the advance notice effect determination processing of the characterizing section 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the ball-out state and sets the notice effect type determination table corresponding to the specified ball-out state (step 162SGS290). It should be noted that the ball-out state may be specified, for example, from the value of a flag that is turned on when the ball-out state designation command is received in the command analysis process.

Here, as shown in FIG. 41-28, when the effect control CPU 120 specifies the low ball output state as the low ball output state, the effect control CPU 120 selects the advance notice effect type determination table A and changes the ball output state to the first high ball output state. If the ball-out state is specified, the table B for determining the type of advance notice effect is selected.

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 162SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display for designating a variable display result (loss, variable probability big win A, variable probability big win B, variable probability big win C, non-variable probability big win, small win) transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above.

Then, the random number for determining the announcement effect is extracted, and the presence or absence of execution of the announcement effect and the type of announcement effect in the case of execution are determined using the table for determining the type of announcement effect set in step 162SG290 (step 162SGS292).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41-28, when the ball payout state is the low ball payout state, using the notice effect type determination table A, if the variable display result is not reachable, 85 10% to decide not to execute the notice effect, 10% to decide to execute the notice effect A, 5% to decide to execute the notice effect B, and 0% to decide the execution of the notice effect C. Execution is decided, and the execution of the advance notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is out of super reach, non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 50%, and execution of the notice effect B is decided at a rate of 30%. Execution of the advance notice performance C is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the notice performance D is determined at a rate of 0%. If the result of the variable display is a big win other than the big win C, non-execution of the advance notice performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the notice performance A is determined at a rate of 25%, and notice performance is determined at a rate of 65%. Execution of B is determined, execution of notice performance C is decided at a rate of 0%, and execution of notice performance D is decided at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball output state is the first high ball output state, using the notice effect type determination table B, if the variable display result is non-reach, the notice effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. Execution of advance notice effect A is decided at a rate of 10%, execution of notice effect B is decided at a rate of 5%, execution of notice effect C is decided at a rate of 0%, and execution of notice effect C is decided at a rate of 0%. Execution of the advance notice performance D is determined. If the variable display result is out of super reach, non-execution of the advance notice effect is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of notice effect A is decided at a rate of 50%, and execution of notice effect B is decided at a ratio of 25%. Execution of the advance notice performance C is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the notice performance D is determined at a rate of 0%. If the result of the variable display is a big win other than the big win C, non-execution of the advance notice performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the notice performance A is determined at a rate of 25%, and notice performance is determined at a rate of 50%. Execution of B is determined, execution of notice performance C is decided at a rate of 15%, and execution of notice performance D is decided at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball output state is the second high ball output state, the notification effect type determination table C is used, and if the variable display result is not reachable, the notification effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. Execution of notice effect A is determined at a rate of 8%, execution of notice effect B is decided at a rate of 4%, execution of notice effect C is decided at a rate of 3%, and execution of notice effect C is decided at a rate of 0%. Execution of the advance notice performance D is determined. If the variable display result is out of super reach, non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 45%, and execution of notice effect B is decided at a rate of 20%. Execution of the advance notice effect C is decided at a rate of 10%, and execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the result of the variable display is a big win other than the big win C, non-execution of the advance notice performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the notice performance A is determined at a rate of 15%, and notice performance is determined at a rate of 45%. Execution of B is determined, execution of advance notice performance C is decided at a rate of 20%, and execution of notice performance D is decided at a rate of 10%.

In other words, as the advance notice effects in the characteristic portion 162SG, the advance notice effect D is set to have the highest degree of expectation for the big hit (the ratio of the variable display results to be a big hit), and the advance notice effect C has a higher degree of expectation for the big hit than the notice effect D. The degree of expectation for big win is set lower in the advance notice performance B than in the advance notice performance C, and in the advance notice performance A, the degree of expectation for big win is set lower than that in the notice performance B.例文帳に追加Then, when the notice effect is not executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit is set lower than when any of the notice effects is executed (expectation for the big hit: notice effect D> notice effect C> notice effect B> notice effect A> non-execution of advance notice effect).

Also, looking at the number of notice effects that can be executed in each state, there are two notice effects that can be executed in the low ball state, the notice effects A and B, and the first high ball state. There are three notice effects: notice effect A, notice effect B, notice effect C, and notice effects that can be executed in the second high ball state are notice effect A, notice effect B, notice effect C, notice effect D. There are four. In other words, in this characteristic portion 162SG, since the number of advance notice effects that can be executed during the variable display increases by continuing the continuous game state after the first hit occurs, the game is slowed down during the continuous game. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the storage.

In particular, in the second high-ball output state, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect D that confirms that the variable display result will be a big hit. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game is played, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Returning to FIG. 41-27, after executing step 162SGS292, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the advance notice effect is determined (step 162SGS293). If execution of the announcement effect is not determined (step 162 SGS293; N), the announcement effect determination process is terminated. Further, when the execution of the notice effect is determined (step 162SGS293; Y), the notice effect type determined in step 162SGS292 is stored (step 162SGS294), the notice effect execution determination flag is turned on (step 162SGS295), and the notice Terminate the effect determination process.

After executing the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 returns to the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. No, that is, it is determined whether or not any one of the "notice effect A" and "notice effect B" has been decided in the notice effect determination process of step 162 SGS277.

When the notice effect execution determination flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step 162SGS279, sets a timer for waiting for the start of notice effect to a value corresponding to the period until the start of notice effect (step 162SGS279), and executes the notice effect. The determination flag is turned off (step 162SGS280), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS281. On the other hand, when the announcement effect execution determination flag is off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS281 without going through steps 162SGS279 and 162SGS280.

As for the period until the start of these advance notice effects, the characterizing section 162SG performs an effect (not shown) indicating a sign of the execution of the notice effect before the timing at which the notice effect is started, and the sign is started. Since the timing is the start timing of the notice effect, a period shorter than the period until the start of the notice effect is set, and the start timing of these notice effects is specified in the process table of the notice effect executed from the start of the notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Since the start timing is the start timing of the notice effect, the period until the start timing of the notice effect may be set in the notice effect start waiting timer.

At step 162 SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball output state, and selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the specified ball output state and the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 162SGS282).

In step 162SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 may specify the ball output state by referring to the value of the effect ball output state flag set in the process of step 162SGS234 of the command analysis process.

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 162SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to commands.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the specified ball output state and the variation pattern specification command (step 162 SGS284). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 162SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 162SGS286).

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process, so that the characterizing portion 162SG determines whether the payout state is any of the low payout state, the first high payout state, and the second high payout state. Even , it is possible to execute the variable display of the decorative design in conjunction with the special figure variable display time. In addition, in this characterizing portion 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a form in which it is possible to execute the variable display of the decoration pattern according to the ball output state by the value of the output ball state flag for effect and the variation pattern designation command. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A command can be transmitted to the performance control board 12 (performance control CPU 120), and the performance control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern designation command and the variation pattern determination state designation command every time it receives a decorative pattern according to the ball output state. may be executed.

FIG. 41-29 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer (step 162SGS301, step 162SGS302, step 162SGS303). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the timer for waiting for the start of the notice effect is set (it is decided to perform the notice effect), or the flag during execution of the notice effect is on (during the execution of the notice effect). Yes) (step 162SGS304; Y), the advance notice effect processing is executed (step 162SGS305). If both the timer for waiting for the start of the announcement effect and the in-execution flag for the announcement effect are off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS306 without executing the announcement effect process of step 162SGS305.

At step 162 SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 162SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 162 SGS308). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 162SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (for performance component) is executed (step 162SGS309b).

Next, it is checked whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 162SGS310). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 162SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen for the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed since the display of the previous decorative pattern was switched). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 162SGS311). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variation of the decorative design. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 162SGS312).

Further, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 162SGS310; N), after executing step 162SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable display time timer has timed out (step 162SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 162 SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination designation command is received is in the ON state (step 162 SGS314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 162SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the fluctuation. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n expires in the process of step 162 SGS306, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and decorative pattern variable display control based on the process table ends.

In addition, when the notice effect is executed in a state where the notice effect start waiting timer is set, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts and updates the value of the notice effect start waiting timer in the notice effect process, and starts the notice effect. Determine whether the wait timer has timed out. When the advance notice effect start waiting timer times out, that is, when it is time to start the notice effect, a process table for notice effect corresponding to the type of notice effect determined to be executed is selected, and the process for the notice effect is selected. Start a timer. That is, the effect device is controlled in accordance with the content of the first process data in the process table for notice effect. Also, the notice effect execution flag is turned on, and the notice effect processing is terminated.

When the notice effect is executed when the notice effect executing flag is on, the effect control CPU 120 updates the process timer for the notice effect by subtraction, and the process timer for the notice effect has timed out. Determine whether or not If the process timer for notice effect has not timed out, control of the effect device is executed according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer being executed, and if the process timer for notice effect has timed out , to switch the process data. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 may start the process timer for the next notice effect anew and control the effect device according to the contents of the next process data. By executing the notice effect processing as described above, the notice effect can be executed during the variable display.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 162SG described above, the high-ball state notification LED 162SG071 is exemplified as a mode in which only lighting and extinguishing are performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the variable display time extension adjustment is performed because the variable display is performed, but the jackpot period extension adjustment is not performed because the jackpot state is not performed. When the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed due to the jackpot state in the ball state, but the variable display time extension adjustment is not executed because the variable display is not executed, the light is lit in red (second mode). , it may be possible to confirm (know) which adjustment is being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 162SG described above, the continuous state continues and the value of the ball output state flag is updated from 0→1→2 (when the ball output state changes from the low ball output state to the first high State, changing to the second high ball output), by extending the fanfare performance period, the interval period, and the ending performance period of the jackpot game during the continuous game state, the balls paid out per unit time. Although the form of suppressing the number of prize balls, that is, reducing the awarding speed of prize balls is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. By determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table for the high output ball state, which has a high determination rate of the variation pattern with a longer special figure variation time such as the variation pattern of super reach than the ball state, it is controlled to the big hit game state. It is also possible to lengthen the period up to and suppress the number of balls released per unit time.

In addition, in the first high-ball state and the second high-ball state, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect for the form in which the variation pattern can be determined using the high-ball state variation pattern determination table. When the variable display remaining number after determination is set to 0 when the post-variable display remaining number is still set to a value of 1 or more, variable display execution pattern to be performed after the post-determination variable display remaining number becomes 0 occurs. There is a big difference between the variation pattern suggested by and the variation pattern actually selected in the variable display (for example, despite suggesting variable display in the super reach variation pattern as a pre-reading notice effect, it is actually non- There is a possibility that a variable display is executed in a reach fluctuation pattern, etc.), and the pre-reading notice effect may become inappropriate.

Therefore, as shown in step 162SGS242a of the pre-reading notice setting process (see FIG. 41-23) of the feature part 162SG, the pre-reading notice effect is executed when the post-judgment variable display remaining count is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit count. By limiting , it is possible to prevent a large difference between the variation pattern suggested by the production pattern of the pre-reading notice effect and the variation pattern actually selected in the variable display, thereby making the pre-reading notice effect inappropriate. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In addition, although not particularly shown in the characteristic portion 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the value of the effect ball output state flag in the jackpot middle effect process shown in FIG. By selecting a process table for fanfare effect according to the state of the game, and controlling the effect device according to the value of the process timer, the fanfare effect corresponding to the state of ball output may be executed.

Further, although not particularly shown in the characteristic portion 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the value of the effect ball output state flag in the ending effect process shown in FIG. The ending effect corresponding to the state of ball output may be executed by selecting the process table for the corresponding ending effect and controlling the effect device according to the value of the process timer.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 162SG, the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination processing shown in FIG. When it is determined that the ball output state is the high ball output state, the value of the ball output state flag is changed from "0" corresponding to the low ball output state to the high ball output state. By setting it to "1", which is a value corresponding to , the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game are lengthened (adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time is started. ) is possible. After setting the ball output state flag to "1", the value of the ball output state flag is set to "0" based on the execution of the variable display 100 times, that is, the ball output state is set to high. By updating from the ball output state to the low ball output state, the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game are returned to the original period. ). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of prize balls put out per unit time during the period in which the state is continuous, and to prevent excessive increase in gambling property due to excessive payout of prize balls in a short period of time. .

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when the value of the ball output state flag is set from "0" to "1", as shown in FIG. By extending the length of time and not extending the special variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach, the increase in the amount of data related to variable display is suppressed, and the variable display time of super reach and normal reach is extended. It prevents the decline of interest due to the fact.

In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, by setting the value of the ball output state flag from "0" to "1", adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time is started, and 100 times of variable display is performed. An example is shown in which the value of the ball-out status flag is set to "0" again based on the execution, thereby completing the adjustment to reduce the speed at which prize balls are dispensed, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, a time measuring means (for example, real-time clock or timer) capable of measuring time is provided, and the time measuring means measures a certain period of time (for example, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, etc.) from the start of the adjustment. to end the adjustment. In other words, the termination condition in the present invention may be that "a certain period of time has passed during the period of the consecutive game state after the CPU 103 set the value of the ball-out state flag to "1"."

Furthermore, in this characteristic part 162SG, as an end condition for ending the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls per unit time, only one execution of the variable display 100 times was exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of termination conditions may be provided for terminating the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of prize balls per unit time. When a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the adjustment are provided in this way, the adjustment may be terminated when any one of the termination conditions is satisfied, or the adjustment may be terminated when a plurality of termination conditions are satisfied. You may make it finish adjustment.

Also, as shown in FIG. 41-8, when the value of the payout state flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, when the payout state is the first high payout state or the second high payout state state, the special figure variable display time in the variation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball output state flag is set to "0" (when the ball output state is a low ball output state) Therefore, by prolonging the period required for the variable display, it is possible to lengthen the time interval until the variable display result becomes a big win during the period of the continuous game state, and the number of prize balls paid out in the big win game state can be increased. It is possible to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls during the period of the continuous residence state without reducing the speed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 41-20 and 41-21, during the jackpot game, when "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball output state flag, the value of the ball output state flag The fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period, in which the game ball cannot enter the big winning hole, are set longer than when "0" is set. For this reason, the number of game balls that can be won during each round game is not reduced according to the value of the ball output state flag, and the game balls cannot enter the big winning opening between each round game during the big win game. The period can be lengthened, and the payout speed of the prize balls per unit time can be reduced during the period of the continuous state.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball output state flag, the jackpot game is more likely than when "0" is set as the value of the ball output state flag. Although the three periods of the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period are exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the ball output state flag is "1" or When "2" is set, any one of the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game than when "0" is set as the value of the ball output state flag, or You may make it lengthen two periods.

Further, in the characteristic part 162SG, the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game are gradually lengthened by updating the value of the ball output state flag from 0 to 1 to 2. , but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "0" to "1", the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period If one or two of the periods are lengthened and the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "1" to "2", the remaining periods may be lengthened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41-11, when the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing at the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the recovery condition is not established, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag to the value of the low ball output state flag. Since "0" corresponding to the state is set, it is possible to prevent the execution of adjustment to lower the payout speed of prize balls per unit time from the start of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Furthermore, when the recovery upper limit is satisfied, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after power failure occurs, the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2" at the time of power failure. If it is set, the CPU 103 again sets "1" or "2" as the value of the ball output state flag, so that the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls is performed when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from the power failure. can be resumed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from power failure, if the value of the ball output state flag at the time of power failure is set to "1" or "2", the CPU 103 Although the form in which "1" or "2" is set again as the value of the status flag has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The value of the status flag may be set to "0", that is, the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize balls, which has been performed when the power failure occurs, may not be performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored as backup data when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Also, as shown in FIG. 41-13, when the CPU 103 judges that the high ball output state is in the ball output state determination processing, the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 starts lighting up under the control of the CPU 103. It is possible to recognize from the outside of the pachinko machine 1 that the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of prize balls is being performed by lighting the high-ball output state notification LED 162SG071.

In addition, in this characterizing part 162SG, the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 can be turned on under the control of the CPU 103 as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 is controlled by performance control. An LED that can be turned on under the control of the CPU 120 may be used. In this case, for example, the game control means (CPU103) can be transmitted to the effect control means (performance control CPU120) the control information (production control command) that can specify whether or not the high grant state. Then, the effect control means is provided with a notification means (high ball state notification LED 162 SG071) that can notify that it is controlled to a high grant state in response to specifying that it is a high grant state from the control information. Just do it.

In addition, in this characterizing part 162SG, as an informing means capable of informing that the high award state (high ball payout state) is determined in the present invention, a mode in which the high ball payout state notification LED 162SG071 is provided was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, the notification means includes sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for notifying that the high-ball state is determined by a specific sound output, high-ball state and Image display means (e.g., image display device 5) for notifying that the judgment is being made by displaying a specific image, and information output means capable of outputting information (signal) corresponding to the judgment of the high-ball state etc.

In addition, the control cycle of lighting and extinguishing of the high output ball state notification LED 162SG071 should be the same as the control cycle of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. So, the CPU 103 can execute the notification by the high output ball state notification LED 162SG071 in the lighting/extinguishing control common to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. It has become.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing shown in FIG. It is possible to transmit a ball output state designation command to the CPU 120). Then, as shown in FIGS. 41-27 and 41-28, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball-out state from the received ball-out state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and sets the specified ball-out state. Whether or not to execute the advance notice effect during variable display and the effect type of the advance notice effect to be executed can be determined using the corresponding advance notice effect type determination table. In particular, in the characteristic portion 162SG, the notice effect (prediction effect type) that can be executed when the ball payout state is the low ball payout state, the first high ball payout state, or the second ball payout state. are different from each other, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the advance notice effect according to the ball-out state.

As shown in FIG. 41-28, this characterizing portion 162SG is executed when the ball payout state is the low ball payout state, the first high ball payout state, and the second ball payout state. Although the form in which the possible notice effect (type of notice effect) is different has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. , in the case of the second ball-out state, the executable notice effect (forecast effect type) may be the same, but the determination ratio of each notice effect type may be different, and the ball-out state is low. In the ball state, the first high ball state, and the second ball state, the executable notice effect (prediction effect type) and the determination ratio of each notice effect type are the same. There may be.

In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, it is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting that the result of the variable display will be a big hit during the variable display, and the type of the notice effect that can be executed is made different according to the state of the ball being put out. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A continuation-suggesting effect that suggests continuation can be executed in a plurality of types of effects, and if the ball-out state is a low ball-out state, if it is in a first high-ball-out state, it is in a second high-ball-out state. Depending on the case, the determination ratio of executable effect types and executable effect types may be varied as these probability-variable suggestive effects and continuous suggestive effects.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 41-23, the effect control CPU 120 can display the pending display of the new pending memory generated by the start winning in a plurality of display patterns by executing the pre-reading notice setting process. A pre-reading advance notice effect can be executed, and the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit is varied according to which display pattern the pending display is displayed. Further, in the feature part 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-reading notice effect when the post-judgment variable display remaining number of times is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number of times in the pre-reading notice setting process. (represented by an open circle)), so if the pre-reading notice effect is executed for the pending memory that occurred in the start winning in the first high-ball state or the second high-ball state, the pre-reading It is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from becoming inappropriate due to the change of the ball payout state to the low ball payout state before the start of the variable display based on the reserved memory which is the target of the notice effect. It's becoming

In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, when the ball payout state is the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state, if the post-judgment variable display remaining count is equal to or less than the predictive limit count, prefetching notice effects are executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the ball-out state is the first high-ball-out state or the second high-ball-out state, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed univocally. You may do so.

The features of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

For example, in the characteristic portion 162SG, when the ball output state is the high ball output state, the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game are set longer than when the ball output state is the low ball output state. At the same time, by prolonging the special figure variable display time of some variation patterns, adjustment was made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time, but the present invention is not limited to this. , As a modified example 162SG-1, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the determination ratio of the probability variable jackpot A as the jackpot type is reduced and the probability variable jackpot B is reduced more than when the ball output state is a low ball output state. may be increased. By doing so, when the ball output state is the high ball output state, the jackpot type is likely to be determined as the variable probability jackpot B with the number of rounds of 5 rounds, and at the same time as the variable probability jackpot A with the number of lands of 10 rounds. Since it becomes difficult to determine, the number of prize balls put out in one big win game can be reduced, and as a result, it is possible to realize an adjustment to lower the speed of putting out prize balls in a high payout state.

Furthermore, as a modification 162SG-2, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the probability variable jackpot (variable probability A, variable jackpot B, variable probability By reducing the determination ratio of the big win C) and increasing the determination ratio of the non-probability variable jackpot, it may be easier to be controlled to the time saving state (low probability high base state) after the end of the big win game. By doing this, in the time saving state (low probability high base state), the ratio of the variable display results to be a big hit than the probability variable state (high probability high base state) is reduced, so as a result 100 times in the time saving state By executing the variable display, it becomes easier to determine the end of the continuous game state, and it becomes easier to control to the normal state. It is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of prize balls in the ball-out state. In addition, the "advantageous period end determination means" in the present invention in this case is the processing of steps 162SGS190 to step 162SGS194 in the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. Processing to subtract the value of the number counter, processing to determine again the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction, processing to turn off the time saving flag) corresponds.

In addition, the CPU 103 of the characteristic portion 162SG changes the game state from the time-saving state (low probability high base state) to the normal state (low probability low base state), that is, to terminate the continuous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 controls the high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state), every time the variable display is started in the special symbol normal processing or each time the variable display is terminated in the special symbol stop processing, a drop lottery (end lottery) in the high base state is executed, and the lottery is executed. It may be controlled to a high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) low probability low base state based on the winning, that is, to end the continuous state. In the case where the drop lottery is executed each time the variable display is started or terminated, for example, when the ball output state is the high ball output state, the ball output state is the low ball output state. It is sufficient to make it easier to win the drop lottery at a higher rate than in the case. In this way, in the high-ball output state, it is easy to determine the end of the consecutive game state, and it is easy to be controlled to the normal state. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to realize an adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball output state. In this case, the "advantageous period end determining means" of the present invention is a process for executing a drop lottery when the CPU 103 starts variable display in the special symbol normal process or when the special symbol stop process is executed. , The process of turning off the probability variation flag and the time saving flag when winning the falling lottery corresponds.

In the characteristic portion 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" under the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times. Change the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state to the low ball payout state on the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state. Although the form of control has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 162SG-3, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag to "1", and then The value of the ball output state flag is set to "0" based on the execution of a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of the jackpot game during the period, that is, the "end condition" in the present invention is set to the "ball output state flag is set to "1" and then a predetermined number of jackpot games have been executed during the period of the continuous residence state. By doing so, the CPU 103 determines that the number of executions of the jackpot game executed after setting the value of the ball output state flag to "1" has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) which is the end number of times. Based on this, the value of the ball output state flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

In the characteristic portion 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" under the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times. Change the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state to the low ball payout state on the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state. Although the form of control has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 162SG-4, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag to "1" and then When the total number of game balls entered into each prize winning hole or into the out hole reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls) during the period, the value of the output ball status flag is set to "0". In other words, the ``end condition'' in the present invention is ``that the number of game balls used in the game during the period of the continuous game state after the value of the ball output state flag is set to '1' reaches a predetermined number. ” may be used. By doing so, the CPU 103 can output the game balls based on the fact that the number of game balls used in the game after setting the value of the output ball status flag to "1" has reached a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls). The value of the ball state flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 162SG, when the value of the payout state flag is "1" (first high payout state) or "2" (second high payout state), special figure variable display in each variation pattern Although an example has been exemplified in which the adjustment is executed to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in a high ball output state by prolonging the time, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the ball output state flag Adjustment may be made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball output state by making the determination ratio of each variation pattern different.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 41-30 and 41-31 as modification 162SG-5, the variation pattern for losing when the value of the ball output state flag is "0" (low ball output state) Judgment table A, variation pattern judgment table B for loss for when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" (first ball output state), ball output state flag value is "2" (second ball output state) ) are provided respectively.

As shown in FIG. 41-30 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A, 1 to 600 out of the possible range 1 to 997 of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are non-reach variation patterns PA1 -1, 601 to 900 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 41-30 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B, 1 to 400 out of the possible range 1 to 997 of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are non-reach variation patterns PA1 -1, 401 to 800 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 41-30 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, 1 to 200 out of the possible range 1 to 997 of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are non-reach variation patterns PA1 -1, 201 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

Here, when comparing the variation pattern determination table A for loss and the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the variation pattern determination table B for loss has a higher rate of non-reach variation patterns than the variation pattern determination table A for loss. While is low, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach is determined is set high. In other words, the variation pattern determination table for failure B is a variation pattern determination table in which a variation pattern with a longer variable display time is more likely to be determined than the variation pattern determination table A for failure.

In addition, when comparing the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss and the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss has a higher rate of non-reach fluctuation patterns than the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss. While it is low, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach is set high. In other words, the deviation variation pattern determination table C is a variation pattern determination table in which a variation pattern with a longer variable display time is more likely to be determined than the deviation variation pattern determination table B. FIG.

That is, among these variation pattern determination table A, variation pattern determination table B, and variation pattern determination table C, variation pattern determination table C has the longest average variable display time, and variation pattern determination table C has the longest average variable display time. A has the shortest average variable display time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 41-31, when the value of the ball output state flag is "0" and the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is selected to determine the variation pattern. If the value of the ball output status flag is "1" and the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern determination table B for winning is selected to determine the variation pattern, and the ball output status flag is set. If the value is "2" and the variable display result is a failure, the variation pattern determination table B for failure may be selected to determine the variation pattern. In this way, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the value of the ball output state flag, it is possible to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball output state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 162SG, the "advantageous state" in the present invention is defined as a jackpot game state, and based on the fact that the jackpot game state is controlled a specific number of times (five times in the characteristic portion 162SG) during the period of the continuous game state. Although the example of setting the value of the ball output state flag from "0" to "1" has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "advantageous state" in the present invention includes a small winning game state. It's okay. In particular, the present invention can be frequently controlled to the small winning game state during the period of the continuous game state, and the game has the game property of paying out the prize balls by winning the game balls into the big winning opening in the small winning game state. When applied to a machine (so-called small-hit rush machine), the total number of times controlled to the big-hit game state and the number of times controlled to the small-hit game state during the period of the continuous state is a specific number (for example, 100 By setting the value of the ball payout state flag from '0' to '1' based on the number of times) being reached, it is possible to realize adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball payout state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 162SG, when it is controlled to the jackpot game state of the non-probability variable jackpot, the form in which the time-saving control is executed 100 times of the variable display after the jackpot game is exemplified, but the present invention is this. However, a non-probability variable jackpot may be provided in which the number of times of time saving control executed after the jackpot game is completed is less than 100 times (for example, 50 times or 30 times). It should be noted that, in this way, when the time-saving control number of times is provided with a non-probable variable jackpot such as 50 times or 30 times, the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2" (high ball output state) After the execution of the non-probability variable jackpot game, when the variable display of the number of times of time reduction control according to the non-probability variable jackpot is executed, the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1", and then the variable display is executed 100 times. The value of the ball output status flag may be set to "0" even if it is not. In other words, if the non-probable variable jackpot is won in the continuous state, and the normal state is reached without winning the jackpot in the time-saving state after the jackpot game of the non-probable variable jackpot is completed, the normal state is reached. Based on this, the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball state may also be terminated.

Further, in this specification, both the pachinko game machine to which the invention of the characteristic part 109SG is applied and the pachinko game machine to which the invention of the characteristic part 162SG is applied are disclosed, but the present invention is not limited to this, Both the invention of the characteristic part 109 and the invention of the characteristic part 162SG may be applied to one pachinko game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Effect control board 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU
200 dispensing device 202 first guide passage forming portion 201 ball tank forming portion 203 first passage forming body 210 terminal board 220 cover bodies 271A to 271H holes 314, 324, 334 cover portion 340 ball stop members N1 to 6, 11 to 16 Screw member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player and that can be controlled to a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
a game control means capable of controlling the progress of a game;
Production control means capable of controlling production based on control information transmitted from the game control means;
When the number of times of the advantageous state occurring in the advantageous period after being controlled from the normal state to the special state until being controlled again to the normal state reaches a specific number of times, predetermined numerical data is changed from a first value. updating means updatable to a second value;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a screw drop limiting portion provided above the guide passage forming portion;
variable means capable of changing between a first state in which game media can easily enter and a second state in which game media cannot enter or is difficult to enter;
limiting means for limiting the flow of game media flowing down the guide passage forming portion;
with
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents the game medium falling on the screw drop-limiting portion from staying and the screw member dropped on the screw drop-limiting portion to drop into the guide passage forming portion. It is configured to be able to stay on the restriction part,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images